MVS-6000 System
(With CCP-9000 Series Center Control Panel)
User’s Guide
Multi Format Switcher System
Volume 1
[English]
1st Edition
Software Version 8.00 and Later
NOTICE TO USERS
© 2009 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This
manual or the software described herein, in whole or in
part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to
any machine readable form without prior written approval
from Sony Corporation.
SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY
WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE
OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND
HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO
THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER
INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY
CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE
THEREOF.
Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any
modification to this manual or the information contained
herein at any time without notice.
The software described herein may also be governed by
the terms of a separate user license agreement.
<Organization of This User’s Guide>
The User’s Guide for this system comprises Volumes 1 to 3.
Volume 1
This book. For the contents of this volume, see “Table of Contents” at the front.
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Chapter 4 Keys
Chapter 5 Wipes
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Appendix (Volume 1)
• Wipe Pattern List
• DME Wipe Pattern List
• Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
• Menu Tree
Index
Volume 2
The volume comprises the following chapters.
Chapter 11 DME Operations
Chapter 12 External Devices
Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects
Chapter 14 Snapshots
Chapter 15 Utility/Shotbox
Chapter 16 Macros
Chapter 17 Files
Appendix (Volume 2)
• SpotLighting
• Functional Differences With Models of DME
• Macro File Editing Rules
• About the Macro Attachment List Display
• Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro
Index
Volume 3
The volume comprises the following chapters.
Chapter 18 System Setup (System)
Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup (Panel)
Chapter 20 Switcher Setup (Switcher)
Chapter 21 DME Setup (DME)
Chapter 22 DCU Setup (DCU)
3
Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally (Router/Tally)
Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote
Panel
Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS
Appendix (Volume 3)
• Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Status Define]
• Error Messages
Index
4
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Introduction ..................................................................................................14
Features of the MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher System......................16
Basic Video Processing.................................................................................18
Transitions .............................................................................................18
Keys.......................................................................................................22
Wipes.....................................................................................................23
DME Wipes ...........................................................................................23
Frame Memory ......................................................................................24
Color Backgrounds................................................................................24
Copy and Swap......................................................................................24
Video Process ........................................................................................25
Color Corrector......................................................................................25
Side Flags ..............................................................................................25
Simple P/P Software..............................................................................26
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations...27
Digital Multi Effects (DME) .................................................................27
External Devices....................................................................................28
Keyframes .............................................................................................28
Snapshots...............................................................................................29
Utility.....................................................................................................30
Shotbox..................................................................................................30
Macros ...................................................................................................30
Files .......................................................................................................31
Setup ..............................................................................................................32
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel .................................34
Example Control Panel Configuration ..................................................34
Cross-Point Control Block ....................................................................36
Transition Control Block.......................................................................37
Device Control Block (Joystick) ...........................................................42
Keyframe Control Block .......................................................................43
Numeric Keypad Control Block............................................................46
Table of Contents
5
Auxiliary Bus Control Block.................................................................49
Menu Control Block ..............................................................................50
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block .......................................................51
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ............................................52
Key Control Block (MKS-8035 Key Control Module, Option) ...........54
Device Control Block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module, Option) ......58
Device Control Block (MKS-8036A Search Dial Module, Option) .....61
Utility/Shotbox Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/Shotbox Module,
Option) .......................................................................................65
Downstream Key Control Block (MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module,
Option) .......................................................................................66
Basic Menu Operations ................................................................................68
Menu Organization................................................................................68
About the Top Menu List ......................................................................68
Accessing Menus...................................................................................68
Displaying a Menu ................................................................................74
Interpreting the Menu Screen ................................................................75
Menu Operations ...................................................................................77
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site ....89
Shortcut Menu .......................................................................................89
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Video Processing Flow .................................................................................94
Signal Selection .............................................................................................96
Basics of Signal Selection .....................................................................96
Bus Selection .........................................................................................97
Signal Assignment and Selection ..........................................................98
Signal Name Display...........................................................................102
Transitions...................................................................................................103
Selecting the Next Transition ..............................................................103
Transition Types..................................................................................103
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation...............................................106
Key Priority Setting....................................................................................109
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block....................109
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation....................................111
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................113
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ..............................114
Super Mix Settings .....................................................................................115
Color Matte Settings...................................................................................116
6
Table of Contents
Executing a Transition ...............................................................................119
Transition Indicator Function ..............................................................119
Setting the Transition Rate ..................................................................120
Pattern Limit........................................................................................122
Executing an Auto Transition..............................................................126
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition) ....127
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ..................................127
Non-Sync State....................................................................................127
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode.........................................128
Transition Preview .....................................................................................131
Independent Key Transitions ....................................................................133
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations....................................136
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation..136
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate......................................137
Chapter 4 Keys
Overview......................................................................................................141
Key Types............................................................................................141
Key Modifiers......................................................................................143
Key Memory........................................................................................146
Key Default .........................................................................................147
Key Setting Operations Using Menus.......................................................148
Key Setting Menus ..............................................................................148
Key Type Setting.................................................................................149
Chroma Key Composition...................................................................151
Chroma Key Adjustments ...................................................................152
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source .....................................................158
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................160
Masks...................................................................................................167
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ........................................................169
Key Modify Clear................................................................................171
Blink Function .....................................................................................171
Video Processing .................................................................................172
Key Setting Operations With the Cross-Point Control Block................173
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ........................................................173
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block .............................175
Operations in the Key Control Block ..................................................175
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................179
Masks...................................................................................................183
Table of Contents
7
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ........................................................184
Other Key Setting Operations .............................................................185
Resizer .........................................................................................................186
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys .......................................186
Resizer Interpolation Settings .............................................................191
Resizer Crop/Border Settings ..............................................................191
Applying Resizer Effects.....................................................................194
Key Snapshots.............................................................................................196
Key Snapshot Operations ....................................................................196
Chapter 5 Wipes
Overview......................................................................................................200
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ...........................................................201
Wipe Settings Menu ............................................................................201
Wipe Pattern Selection ........................................................................201
Setting Wipe Modifiers .......................................................................201
Wipe Modify Clear..............................................................................212
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .....................................213
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings........213
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .........................214
Wipe Snapshots...........................................................................................218
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................218
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Overview......................................................................................................222
Types of DME Wipe Pattern ...............................................................222
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers.......................................229
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ..............................230
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings .................................................232
DME Wipe Settings Menu ..................................................................232
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ..............................................................232
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers .............................................................234
DME Wipe Modify Clear....................................................................241
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...........................242
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings
..................................................................................................242
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers................243
Resizer DME Wipe Setting ........................................................................246
DME Wipe Snapshots ................................................................................248
8
Table of Contents
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................248
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .........................................249
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .......................................249
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Overview......................................................................................................256
Still Image Operations ...............................................................................259
Preparations .........................................................................................259
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ................................................260
Selecting an Input Image .....................................................................263
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ....................................264
Capturing and Saving an Input Image .................................................265
Recalling Still Images .........................................................................269
Image Processing.................................................................................271
Image Output .......................................................................................276
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) ...................................277
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation)..........279
Frame Memory Clip Function ..................................................................282
Frame Memory Clip Operations...............................................................284
Preparations for Operation ..................................................................284
Recalling Clips ....................................................................................284
Clip Playback ......................................................................................286
Clip Creation .......................................................................................290
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders..................................292
Clip Output ..........................................................................................293
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data .........................................293
Clip Transition Operations........................................................................296
Image Data Management...........................................................................299
Pair File Processing .............................................................................299
Moving Files........................................................................................300
Deleting Files ......................................................................................301
Renaming Files....................................................................................302
External Hard Disk Drive Access .............................................................303
Hard Disk Formatting..........................................................................303
Saving Files .........................................................................................304
Recalling Files .....................................................................................305
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Color Background ......................................................................................308
Table of Contents
9
Color Background Settings Menu .......................................................308
Basic Color Background Setting Operations.......................................308
Copy and Swap ...........................................................................................312
Copy and Swap Operations .......................................................................316
Copy and Swap Menu Operations.......................................................316
Copy by Button Operation ..................................................................317
Misc Menu Operations...............................................................................318
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ............................318
Editing Keyboard Settings...................................................................319
Safe Title Settings ...............................................................................320
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings.......321
AUX Menu Operations ..............................................................................323
AUX Bus Settings ...............................................................................323
Status Menu ................................................................................................324
Router Control Menu Operations.............................................................325
Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination ...............................325
Switching the Source for Each Destination.........................................326
Video Process ..............................................................................................327
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .......................327
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus .................................327
Video Process Memory .......................................................................328
Video Process Settings................................................................................329
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Preparations ................................................................................................332
Overall Color Corrector Operations ........................................................334
Enabling Color Corrector ....................................................................334
Copy and Swap Operations .................................................................334
Color Corrector Functions ........................................................................336
Input Video Processing Operations .....................................................336
Primary Color Correction Operations .................................................337
Secondary Color Correction Operations .............................................340
RGB Clip Operations ..........................................................................341
Luminance Processing Operations ......................................................342
Spot Color Adjustment ........................................................................345
Output Video Processing Operations ..................................................347
YUV Clip Operations ..........................................................................348
10
Table of Contents
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Side Flags.....................................................................................................352
Overview .............................................................................................352
Side Flag Settings ................................................................................352
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ............................................354
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ..............................355
Simple P/P Software ...................................................................................357
Overview .............................................................................................357
Restrictions on Use..............................................................................357
Simple P/P Output Signal Selection on an M/E ..................................360
Appendix (Volume 1)
Wipe Pattern List .......................................................................................362
DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................................363
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .......................363
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode.......................367
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ...............................................................370
Menu Tree ...................................................................................................372
Recalling Menus..................................................................................372
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus .......................................................................372
PGM/PST Menu ..................................................................................375
Frame Memory Menu..........................................................................377
Color Bkgd Menu ................................................................................378
AUX/MON Menu................................................................................378
CCR Menu...........................................................................................379
Copy/Swap Menu ................................................................................380
Misc Menu...........................................................................................380
Status Menu .........................................................................................380
DME Menu..........................................................................................381
Global Effect Menu .............................................................................382
Device Menu .......................................................................................382
Macro Menu ........................................................................................383
Key Frame Menu.................................................................................384
Effect Menu .........................................................................................385
Snapshot Menu ....................................................................................386
Shotbox Menu .....................................................................................387
File Menu ............................................................................................388
Engineering Setup Menu .....................................................................389
Table of Contents
11
Diagnostic Menu .................................................................................393
Index ............................................................................................................394
12
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Introduction ................................................................................................14
Features of the MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher System ....................16
Basic Video Processing ...............................................................................18
Transitions ...........................................................................................18
Keys .....................................................................................................22
Wipes ...................................................................................................23
DME Wipes .........................................................................................23
Frame Memory ....................................................................................24
Color Backgrounds ..............................................................................24
Copy and Swap ....................................................................................24
Video Process ......................................................................................25
Color Corrector ....................................................................................25
Side Flags ............................................................................................25
Simple P/P Software ............................................................................26
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations .27
Digital Multi Effects (DME) ...............................................................27
External Devices ..................................................................................28
Keyframes ...........................................................................................28
Snapshots .............................................................................................29
Utility ...................................................................................................30
Shotbox ................................................................................................30
Macros .................................................................................................30
Files .....................................................................................................31
Setup ............................................................................................................32
Introduction
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
This manual is the User’s Guide for the MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher
system.
This manual describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP9000 series of center control panels.
The User’s Guide for this system comprises three volumes.
For the contents of each volume, see the section “Organization of This User’s
Guide” at the front of this volume.
Devices and system nomenclature
In this manual, when discussing the principal components of the MVS-6000
system, in place of the formal product names, abbreviated names
characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used. When
distinctions between system configurations must be drawn, the terms in the
following table are used.
Principal components and naming
The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS-6000
system, and the terms used in this manual are as follows.
Formal product name
Term used in this manual
MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher Processor
Switcher or switcher processor
MKS-6470 Board Set
DME or DME board set or MKS-6470
MVE-8000A Multi Format DME Processor
DME or DME processor or MVE8000A
MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor
DME or DME processor or MVE-9000
CCP-9000/9000A-series Center Control Panel Control panel or center control panel
DCU-8000 (MKS-8700) Device Control Unit
DCU or MKS-8700
DCU-2000 (MKS-2700) Device Control Unit
DCU or MKS-2700
System nomenclature
The following terms are used for systems, depending on the combination of
installed options, and the signal format.
14
Introduction
System configuration and features
Term for system
System with installed option boards and
settings to support HDTV format
HD system
System with installed option boards and
settings to support SDTV format
SD system
System configuration and features
Term for system
A system in which the center control panel has 2M/E system
two M/E banks
A system in which the center control panel has 1M/E system
one M/E bank
Related manuals
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the MVS6000 Multi Format Switcher system.
MVS-6000 Switcher Processor Pack
• MVS-6000 Operation Manual
• MVS-6000/8000 Installation Manual
MVE-8000A DME Processor Pack
• MVE-8000A Operation Manual
• MVE-8000A Installation Manual
MKS-6470 DME Board Set
• MKS-6470 Operation Manual
• MKS-6470 Installation Manual
MVE-9000-C DME Processor Pack
• MVE-9000-C Operation Manual
• MVE-9000-C Installation Manual
CCP-9000-C Center Control Panel Pack
• CCP-9000-C Operation Manual
• CCP-9000-C Installation Manual
• CCP-9000A-C Operation Manual
• CCP-9000A-C Installation Manual
DCU-8000 Device Control Unit Pack
• DCU-8000 Operation Manual
• DCU-8000 Installation Manual
DCU-2000 Device Control Unit Pack
• DCU-2000-C Operation Manual
• DCU-2000-C Installation Manual
Introduction
15
Features of the MVS-6000 Multi Format
Switcher System
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
The MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher System boasts high performance and
multifunctionality. The following are some of the principal features of this
system.
System configuration flexibility
Multiformat support
This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats. The format
selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation.
For the signal formats that can be selected, see “Setting the Signal Format” in
Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
Extensible system configuration
By suitable combination of options, the switcher can be configured with
various inputs and outputs, and different numbers of M/E banks. The system
offers the flexibility to change and expand as required.
Additionally, by installing the optional MKS-6470 DME Board Set, you can
obtain the functionality of two DME channels.
Powerful external device interfaces
By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar, a large system can be
built. From the control panel, it is also possible to operate other equipment,
including VTRs and disk recorders.
Powerful tally system
The complete system including routing switcher provides an all-inclusive tally
system. The system can be adapted to different applications and settings, using
multiple tally outputs, including both on-air and recording tallies.
Comprehensive video manipulation
M/E banks
Each mix/effects bank (M/E bank) is equipped with four keyers, and each
keyer is capable not only of chroma keying, but also independent key
transitions separate from the background transitions. The four keys can be
freely combined, to carry out four different program outputs.
16
Features of the MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher System
Powerful frame memory functions
An HDTV system can hold approximately 1,000 still image frames or 2,000
frames in 720P/59.94 format, and an SDTV system can hold approximately
5,000 frames in 480i/59.94 format or 4,000 frames in 576i/50 format in
memory, and up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously.
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Link operation with DME
Using the MKS-6470 DME Board Set (option), a range of DME functions
including DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher
functions.
You can use a maximum of two DME channels.
Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment
High-performance user interface
The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel, with rapid touchpanel menu selection.
The source name displays have color backlit LCD displays. The signal names,
and graphical representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide
intuitive feedback, and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live
operating environment.
Features of the MVS-6000 Multi Format Switcher System
17
Basic Video Processing
This section introduces basic functions used for video processing on the
switcher.
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Transitions
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, the switch from the current video stream
(appearing on the corresponding program monitor) to a new video stream is
referred to as a transition.
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can change one of the images, the
background, and keys 1 to 4 (downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM/PST bank),
and also vary combinations of these simultaneously.
The following are examples of transition.
Changing the background
A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the
background A bus (the current video) to the video selected on the background
B bus (the new video).
Transition
Background A
Background B
In the default selection of flip-flop mode (see page 128), the background
always switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus. When the
transition completes, the cross-point selections on the A and B buses are
interchanged.
18
Basic Video Processing
Inserting and deleting a key
You can insert one or more of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/
PST bank).
If you select a key which is already inserted, the transition will delete the key.
A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible.
Key 1
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Insert
Delete
Key 2
Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2
Key 1
Transition
Key 2
Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2
Basic Video Processing
19
Simultaneously changing the background and keys
You can change any of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/PST bank)
and the background at the same time.
Key 1
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Transition
Key 2
Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously
Key 1
Transition
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously
Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs.
The following are the transition type.
• Mix
• NAM (non-additive mix)
• Super mix
• Preset color mix (color matte)
• Wipe
• DME wipe
• Clip transition
• Cut
20
Basic Video Processing
There are two modes for carrying out a transition: auto transitions are carried
out by a button operation, and manual transitions are carried out using the fader
lever. It is also possible to combine these two modes.
Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
In addition to common transitions, it is possible to carry out independent
transitions on the keyers of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank. These are
called “independent key transitions.”
By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common
transition, different transition types can be used for the background and keys.
The following description compares the independent key transition with a
common transition, taking a simultaneous change of the background and key
as an example.
Video used in the transition
Background B
Background A
Key to insert
Effect of a common transition
In the case shown in the previous illustration, carrying out a common transition
produces the following change in the image.
Transition type: wipe
Same wipe is applied to
background and key.
Effect of a common transition
Basic Video Processing
21
Effect of use with an independent key transition
The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background
changes with a common transition, providing the following result.
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Transition type:
wipe
Independent key
transition type:
wipe
Different wipe patterns are applied to
the background and key transitions.
Effect of a background transition and independent key transition
For details of transitions, see Chapter 3 “Signal Selection and Transitions”
(page 93).
Keys
A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an
image or superimposed text. The signal determining how the background is cut
out is termed “key source,” and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is
termed “key fill.” The system component responsible for processing a key is
referred to as a keyer.
Each switcher bank has four keyers.
On each switcher bank, you can use the following key types (methods of
processing the key source).
• Luminance key
• Linear key
• Color vector key
• Chroma key
• Key wipe pattern key
Key modifiers
You can apply borders and other modifiers to the edge of the key image.
22
Basic Video Processing
Masks
A mask allows a part of the image to be replaced by the background or a key.
To prevent unwanted holes in the background, or if a key is not the desired
shape, you can correct this with a mask.
Resizer
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
This function allows you to apply effects, similar to a DME, such as zoom,
movement, or aspect ratio change to a part of a created key. You can use the
following operations.
• Two-dimensional transform of a key
• Resizer interpolation settings
• Resizer crop/border settings
• Resizer effect settings (mosaic, defocus)
For details, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 139).
Wipes
A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream,
using a wipe pattern.
Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a “background
wipe,” and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a “key wipe.”
There are two types of wipe: those that can be selected in a common transition,
and those that can be selected in an independent key transition.
You can also specify the wipe direction, or set the pattern position, applying
various changes and modifiers to the selected wipe pattern.
For details, see Chapter 5 “Wipes” (page 199).
DME Wipes
A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one
video image to the next.
There are two types of DME wipe: those which can be selected for a normal
transition, and those which can be selected for an independent key transition.
The patterns that can be used for a DME wipe are as follows.
Slide, Squeeze, Door, Flip tumble, Frame in-out, Picture-in-picture, 2D
trans, 3D trans, Mosaic, Defocus, Brick, and User programmable DME
Basic Video Processing
23
You can also specify the wipe direction, or set the pattern position, applying
various changes and modifiers to the selected DME wipe pattern.
Resizer DME wipes
Using the resizer, you can carry out key DME wipes.
For details, see Chapter 6 “DME Wipes” (page 221).
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Frame Memory
Frame memory is a function for using a still image or video (frame memory
clip) as material for editing.
You can create a still image by capturing a frame of input video or a clip by
specifying a range of input video. The created images and clips can be written
to memory for playback, editing, and output.
For details, see Chapter 7 “Frame Memory” (page 255).
Color Backgrounds
This function can be used to obtain color background video.
One color signal generated from the dedicated generators can be output.
For details, see “Color Background” (page 308).
Copy and Swap
This function can be used to copy and swap the settings among the M/E-1 to
M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks or between keyers.
The following settings can be copied or swapped.
• Overall settings for the M/E and PGM/PST banks
• Keyer settings
• Wipe settings in a transition control block
• Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• DME wipe settings in a transition control block
• DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• Matte data (color 1, color 2, and how to compose them)
• Color settings
• DME channel settings
• Format converter input settings (copy only)
• Format converter output settings (copy only)
24
Basic Video Processing
For details, see “Copy and Swap” (page 312).
Video Process
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
The term “video process” is applied to adjustments to the gain, hue, black level
of the input video signal. There are two types of adjustment; adjustment of an
individual primary input signal and adjustment as image effects on a particular
bus
For details, see “Video Process” (page 327).
Color Corrector
The color corrector enables video signal color correction (black balance/white
balance adjustment, gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).
The color corrector includes the following adjustments.
• Input video processing
• Primary color correction
• Secondary color correction
• RGB clip
• Luminance processing
• Spot color adjustment
• Output video processing
• YUV clip
For details, see Chapter 9 “Color Corrector” (page 331).
Side Flags
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a
separate image selected from the utility bus.
Basic Video Processing
25
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Image to fill the side flag
areas (selected from utility
bus)
Input source with aspect ratio
Turn the side flag
function on
Side flag area
Side flag area
For details, see “Side Flags” (page 352).
Simple P/P Software
By installing the BZS-6250 Simple P/P Software in the MVS-6000 Switcher
Processor, you can use a separate program/preset function without using the M/
E hardware.
For details, see “Simple P/P Software” (page 357).
26
Basic Video Processing
Creation of Special Effects and
Management of Data and Operations
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
This section introduces functions used for creation of special effects, control of
external devices or switcher operations, and data management.
Digital Multi Effects (DME)
When used with the switcher, DME allows you to add three-dimensional
effects such as image movement, rotation, magnification and shrinking, as well
as a wide variety of special effects.
Each channel can be used on its own or in combination with other channels,
which allows you to create advanced effects with more complexity.
The following types of DME special effects are available.
• Edge effects: Border, Crop, Beveled Edge, Key Border, Art Edge, Flex
Shadow, Drop Shadow
• Effects for entire image: Defocus, Blur, Multi Move
• Effects for video image: Sepia, Mono, Posterization, Solarization, Nega,
Contrast, Mosaic, Mask, Sketch, Metal, Dim and Fade, Glow
• Freeze effects
• Nonlinear effects: Wave, Mosaic Glass, Flag, Twist, Ripple, Rings, Broken
Glass, Flying Bar, Blind, Split, Split Slide, Mirror, Multi Mirror,
Kaleidoscope, Lens, Circle, Panorama, Page Turn, Roll, Cylinder, Sphere,
Explosion, Swirl, Melt, Character Trail
• Lighting effects: Lighting, Spotlighting
• Recursive effects: Trail, Motion Decay, Keyframe Strobe
• Background color
• Separate Sides (effects for front and back sides)
• Signal inversion (Invert effect)
• Key density adjustment
• Key source selection
Global effects
Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of
successive channels. The following types of global effects are available.
• Combiner
• Brick
• Shadow
For details, see Chapter 11 “DME” (Volume 2).
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations
27
External Devices
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
In this system, you can operate while controlling the following types of
external device:
• Devices supporting P-Bus (Peripheral II protocol)
• Devices supporting GPI
• VTRs
• Disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol and video disk communications
protocol)
• Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol)
For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony
representative.
You can control an external device by previously registering timeline
keyframes.
For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2).
Keyframes
A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image; it can be saved in a
register (see “Register” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2)) and recalled for reuse.
By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis, and interpolating
between successive keyframes, you can create an effect in which there is a
continuous change from each keyframe to the next.
28
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations
The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern (the
circle) in different positions. This is interpolated to create the effect shown.
Background A
Background B
Keyframe 2
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Keyframe 1
Interpolated images
Keyframe 3
Effect execution
Example of keyframes and effect execution
You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a
register. Then by recalling this register, you can replay the same effect.
For details, see Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2).
Snapshots
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the various settings required
to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in a register as a set of data,
for recall as required, to recover the original state.
Snapshots are divided as follows.
• Snapshots applying to a particular region (functional block of the switcher or
DME)
• Master snapshot
• Key snapshot
• Wipe snapshot
• DME wipe snapshot:
An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to
switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled.
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations
29
These conditions are called “attributes” of the snapshot, and can be added when
the snapshot is saved or recalled.
For details, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2).
Utility
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary
action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button, then
instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button.
For details, see “Utility Execution” in Chapter 15 (Volume 2).
Shotbox
The term “shotbox” refers to a function whereby for each specified region (see
“Region” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2)) any snapshot or keyframe effect can be
recalled simultaneously.
For details, see “Shotbox” in Chapter 15 (Volume 2).
Macros
The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal
selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory,
so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same
sequence of operations.
The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed
“events.
Macros also provide the following functions.
Menu macros
The term “menu macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu
operations is saved as data in memory, so that it can be recalled as required to
automatically execute the same sequence of operations.
Macro timeline
By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline, in the same way as
for keyframes in an effect, you can automatically execute them in a sequence.
30
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations
Macro attachment
Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a
control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever, linking the
execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro
execution.
For details, see Chapter 18 “Macros” (Volume 2).
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Files
You can save register data, including setup information and snapshot
information, as a file on a hard disk or memory card, and recall it as required.
You can operate on individual files or registers, or together in a batch.
Regarding frame memory, it is possible to capture image data stored in an
external device into frame memory. You can also convert the format of image
data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device.
The following files can be saved and recalled.
• Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices
• Device status data for system startup
• Key memory setting data
• Video process memory setting data
• Keyframe effect setting data
• Snapshot setting data
• Wipe snapshot setting data
• DME wipe snapshot setting data
• Key snapshot setting data
• Shotbox setting data
• Macro setting data
• Macro attachment data
• Menu macro setting data
• Frame memory image data
For details, see Chapter 17 “Files” (Volume 2).
Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations
31
Setup
Chapter 1 MVS-6000 Functions
Various settings are required, in order to operate the switcher, control panel,
DME, external devices, and so on, connected together in a single system.
This is referred to as “setup,” and you can carry out the setup operations from
the Engineering Setup menu.
The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following
headings.
• System setup (System)
For details, see Chapter 18 “System Setup” (Volume 3).
• Panel setup (Panel)
For details, see Chapter 19 “Control Panel Setup (Panel)” (Volume 3).
• Switcher setup (Switcher)
For details, see Chapter 20 “Switcher Setup (Switcher)” (Volume 3).
• DME setup (DME)
For details, see Chapter 21 “DME Setup (DME)” (Volume 3).
• DCU setup (DCU)
For details, see Chapter 22 “DCU Setup (DCU)” (Volume 3).
• Router/tally setup (Router/Tally)
For details, see Chapter 23 “Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally
(Router/Tally)” (Volume 3).
32
Setup
Chapter 2 Menus and Control
Panel
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel ...............................34
Example Control Panel Configuration ................................................34
Cross-Point Control Block ..................................................................36
Transition Control Block .....................................................................37
Device Control Block (Joystick) .........................................................42
Keyframe Control Block .....................................................................43
Numeric Keypad Control Block ..........................................................46
Auxiliary Bus Control Block ...............................................................49
Menu Control Block ............................................................................50
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block .....................................................51
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ..........................................52
Key Control Block (MKS-8035 Key Control Module, Option) .........54
Device Control Block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module, Option) ....58
Device Control Block (MKS-8036A Search Dial Module, Option) ...61
Utility/Shotbox Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/Shotbox Module,
Option) .....................................................................................65
Downstream Key Control Block (MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module,
Option) .....................................................................................66
Basic Menu Operations ..............................................................................68
Menu Organization ..............................................................................68
About the Top Menu List ....................................................................68
Accessing Menus .................................................................................68
Displaying a Menu ..............................................................................74
Interpreting the Menu Screen ..............................................................75
Menu Operations .................................................................................77
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site ..89
Shortcut Menu .....................................................................................89
Names and Functions of Parts of the
Control Panel
Example Control Panel Configuration
Device control block (joystick) (page 42)
Auxiliary bus control block (page 49)
Numeric keypad control block (page 46)
“Memory Stick”/USB connections block (page 52)
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Menu control block (page 50)
Keyframe control block (page 43)
Key control block (page 54)
Device control block
(page 58)
M/E-1 bank
Utility/Shotbox control
block (page 65)
PGM/PST bank
Cross-point control block (page 36)
Up to three units
connectable
Transition control block (page 37)
Downstream key control
block (page 66)
Example control panel configuration (with CCP-9000A 2M/E panel)
34
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Device control block (joystick) (page 42)
Auxiliary bus control block (page 49)
Numeric keypad control block (page 46)
“Memory Stick”/USB connections block (page 52)
Menu control block (page 50)
Keyframe control block (page 43)
Key control block (page 54)
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Device control block
(page 58)
Utility/Shotbox control
block (page 65)
M/E-1 bank
Cross-point control block (page 36)
Up to three units
connectable
Transition control block (page 37)
Downstream key control
block (page 66)
Example control panel configuration (with CCP-9000A 1M/E panel)
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
35
Cross-Point Control Block
In the cross-point control block, you can
select the signals to be used in this M/E
bank or PGM/PST bank.
2 Source name displays
Key row
4 XPT HOLD button
Key row delegation buttons
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
DME1
DME2
UTIL
5 SHIFT button
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Background B row
Background A row
1 Cross-point buttons
a Cross-point buttons
These buttons select the signals used for
video creation on this M/E bank or PGM/
PST bank. Each row of buttons corresponds
to one or more signal buses within the
switcher.
Key row: The buttons in this row select the
bus signals specified with the key row
delegation buttons ([DSK1] to [DSK4],
[DME1] to [DME2] or [UTIL]) or
delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus
control block.
36
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
The later pressed delegation button
takes precedence and the selection is
reflected in the key row.
Background A row: Press the desired
button to select the signal as the current
background video on this M/E bank or
PGM/PST bank.
Background B row: Press the desired
button to select the signal as the
background after the next transition on
this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank.
c Key row delegation buttons
Use these buttons to assign buses to the key
row, copy keys, or assign DME to keys.
For details, see “Cross-point button
control block button numbers” (page 99).
d XPT (cross-point) HOLD button
Turning this button on enables you to recall
a keyframe or snapshot while keeping the
current cross-point selection unchanged.
This function is valid for the background A
and B rows.
By means of setup settings, you can also
enable this for the following function
blocks.
• Background A and B rows
• Key buses
• Utility
• External DME bus
Assigning signals to button
You can assign a signal to each button using
the Setup menu.
For details on the operation, see “CrossPoint Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in
Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Visual indications on cross-point
buttons
For details on the operation, see “Colors of
lit cross-point buttons” (page 102).
b Source name displays
These show the names of the signals which
can be selected on the cross-point buttons,
in two or four characters, or in auto mode.
While the [SHIFT] button or the [SHIFT]
button assigned to the column of crosspoint buttons is enabled, the source name of
the signal assigned to the column of crosspoint buttons in shift mode appears. You
can select green, orange, or yellow for the
background color of the source name
display, for each source separately. You can
set the source name display mode and
background color in a Setup menu.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Cross-point button numbers
Cross-point button and reentry buttons are
respectively numbered.
e SHIFT button
When this button is enabled, either the
source name displays show the shifted
signal names, or the shifted signals for all
buses in this M/E (P/P) bank are enabled.
You can select either mode in a Setup
menu.
Each press of the button toggles between
the enabled and disabled states.
Using a Setup menu operation, you can also
make this button function as the [SHIFT]
button for the whole cross-point control
block inclusive of the key row and
background A and B rows.
Transition Control Block
In the transition control block, you can
modify the output of the M/E bank or PGM/
PST bank, and perform transitions. Both
common transition and independent key
transition operations are possible.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
37
9 PRIOR SET button
1 Next transition selection buttons
8 Key status display
2 Transition type selection buttons
0 Independent key/downstream
key transition execution section
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY
PRIOR
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
KEY3
DSK1
TRANS
KEY4
SUPER
MIX
NAM
DSK2
TRANS
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
PRIOR
SET
NORM
WIPE
NORM
/REV
DME
REV
AUTO
TRANS
DSK3
TRANS
TRANS
PVW
CUT
DSK4
TRANS
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
7 KF button
6 Pattern limit buttons
5 TRANS PVW button
3 Transition execution section
4 Wipe direction selection buttons
a Next transition selection buttons
Press these buttons, turning them on, to
determine what the next transition will
apply to.
BKGD: Next transition changes the
background.
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the
PGM/PST bank): Press this button,
turning it on, to make the next
transition insert or remove the
corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a
38
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
key is currently inserted it will be
removed, and vice versa.
In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or
removes downstream keys 1 to 4.
KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button
is lit, the setting of the key priority after
the next transition is enabled. The key
priority after the next transition appears
in the key status display.
ALL: Pressing this button turns on a
preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1]
to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons.
Make this setting in a Setup menu.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
b Transition type selection buttons
You can assign these buttons in setup to any
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3)).
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
determine the type of the next transition.
When multi-program mode is selected in
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter
20 (Volume 3)), two or more of the
following buttons may light.
You can also assign a function to these
buttons to select whether or not the fader
levers are used as keyframe faders.
MIX: In a background transition, the new
video fades in as the current video
fades out. During the transition, the
overall signal level is maintained at
100%.
In a key transition, the key fades in (for
insertion) or out (for removal).
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and
new video signals are compared, and
the signal with the higher luminance
level is given priority in the output.
The current video is maintained at
100% output for the first half of the
transition as the new video increases
progressively to 100%, then the current
video is progressively reduced from
100% to zero in the second half while
the new video is maintained at 100%.
SUPER MIX: The current video is
maintained at 100% output for the first
half of the transition as the new video is
mixed while increasing progressively
to 100%. The current video is then
progressively reduced from 100% to
zero in the second half while the new
video is maintained at 100%.
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first
transition, the current video is replaced
by the color matte in a mix (dissolve),
then in the second transition the color
matte is replaced by the new video also
in a mix (dissolve).
In place of a color matte, you can select
any signal on the utility bus.
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the
new video, using the wipe pattern
selected in the Wipe menu.
DME: A wipe type of transition is carried
out, using the DME effect selected in
the DME Wipe menu.
FM1&2CLIP, FM3&4CLIP,
FM5&6CLIP, FM7&8CLIP: A
recorded clip is played back together
with the transition. At this point, you
can also carry out a transition (wipe or
mix (dissolve)) simultaneously
together with the clip.
KF (keyframe): Press this button, turning
it on, to enable using the fader lever as
a keyframe fader.
c Transition execution section
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the transition.
Fader lever: Move up or down to carry out
the transition. When the [KF] button or
a transition type selection button to
which the KF button function has been
assigned is lit, you can use this as a
keyframe fader.
Transition rate display: This shows the
“transition rate” (the time from the
beginning of a transition to its
completion) set for an auto transition,
in frames.
You can set the transition rate using the
numeric keypad control block or menu.
AUTO TRANS (transition) button:
Pressing this button carries out an auto
transition of the set transition rate
(duration). The transition starts
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
39
immediately, and the button lights
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
CUT button: Pressing this button carries
out the transition as a cut (i.e.
instantaneously).
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
d Wipe direction selection buttons
When you have selected a wipe or DME
wipe as the transition type, press one of
these buttons, turning it on, to select the
wipe direction.
NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in
the direction from black to white as
shown on the pattern in the lists of
patterns see “Wipe Pattern List” (page
362) and “DME Wipe Pattern List”
(page 363), or in the direction of the
arrow.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button plays the
tape.
REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the
opposite direction to that when the
[NORM] button is pressed.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button cues the tape
automatically to the start point.
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe
direction alternates between normal
and reverse every time a transition is
executed.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button stops the
tape.
e TRANS PVW (transition preview)
button
When this button is lit, you can check in
advance the video changes during the
transition, on the preview output from the
M/E or PGM/PST bank.
40
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
During the preview, you can use the fader
lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT]
button. One of the following functions of
this button can be selected in a Setup mode.
• When the transition completes, the
system returns to the normal mode.
• The transition preview mode is
maintained while this button is pressed.
• Switching is made between the transition
preview mode and normal mode every
time this button is pressed.
f Pattern limit buttons
PTN (pattern) LIMIT: Pressing this
button, turning it on, enables the
pattern limit function.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button plays the
tape.
LIMIT SET: Use this button to set a
pattern limit when the [PTN LIMIT]
button is off.
Move the fader lever to the position of
a particular pattern size, and stop it
there, then press this button to set the
pattern limit range.
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button stops the
tape.
g KF (keyframe) button
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled in
setup, pressing this button cues the tape
automatically to the start point. When not,
pressing this button to turn it on allows you
to use the fader lever as a keyframe fader.
h Key status display
For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding
ON indicator lights when the key is
inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4)
of each key.
i PRIOR (priority) SET button
While this button is held down, you can set
the key priority.
The setting mode when this button is
pressed depends on whether or not the
[KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the
current key priority is set.
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the
key priority after the next transition is set.
Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required,
to switch between these two modes.
In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR
SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1]
to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you
want to bring to the front.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
The following controls are used as the
independent key transition control block.
j Independent key/downstream key
transition execution section
KEY1 TRANS to KEY4 TRANS (DSK1
TRANS to DSK4 TRANS in the
PGM/PST bank) buttons: These
correspond to keys 1 to 4 from top to
bottom; press one to carry out an auto
transition. The transition rate for an
independent key transition can be set in
the numeric keypad control block or in
a menu.
The color with which buttons are lit shows
the status, as follows.
Lit green: During a transition
Lit amber: Key on. Not inserted into
program video (final output video from
the switcher).
Lit red: Key on. Inserted into program
video (final output video from the
switcher).
Not lit: Key off.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
41
Device Control Block (Joystick)
The joystick type device control block is
used for three-dimensional transform
operations using a DME.
1 Operating buttons
EFF
LOOP
STOP
NEXT
KF
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
EFF
DUR
DELAY
CONST
DUR
KF
LOOP
NORM
/REV
REV
COPY
PASTE
DEL
UNDO
FROM
TO
RUN
CTRL
INS
MOD
GOTO
KF/TC
PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MENU
LOCAL
GLB
SRC
TRGT
AXIS
LOC
ASP
SKEW
PERS
LOC
SIZE
LOC
XYZ
ROT
SHIFT
CLR
WORK
BUFR
X
Y
Z
2 Joystick
PAUSE
RE
WIND
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
RUN
CTR
3 MENU button
a Operating buttons
The functions of these buttons are
equivalent to the functions in threedimensional transform operation mode of
the operating buttons of the trackball type
device control block.
Note
To select a required DME channel, use the
region selection buttons in the numeric
keypad control block.
Use of the SHIFT button
Pressing a button in the device control
block while holding down the [SHIFT]
button enables the shifted function of the
button. Also, pressing a button in the
keyframe control block while holding down
42
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
the [SHIFT] button enables the shifted
function of the button.
About the [CLR WORK BUFR] (clear
work buffer) button
When [M/E-1] or [P/P] is selected along in
the numeric region selection buttons of the
keypad control block, press this button
twice in rapid succession to reset all
parameters of the selected M/E or P/P to
their initial values. When a DME channel is
selected in the region selection buttons, the
operation is the same as when using a
trackball type device control block in the
three-dimensional transform operation
mode.
b Joystick
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
By moving this, you can carry out
operations in the x-, y-, and z-axes.
When the following buttons are held down,
operation of the joystick is switched to a
finer control. (fine mode)
• The button on the end of the joystick
• [SRC] button
• [TRGT] button
Depending on the settings made in the
Setup menu, the operation speed multiple
can be changed.
When the effect run control mode is
enabled
By moving the joystick sideways, you can
run the keyframe effect, independent of the
STOP NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar
settings in the keyframe control block.
Move to the right to run the effect in the
normal direction, and to the left for the
reverse direction.
c MENU button
The function of this button is equivalent to
the function of the [MENU] button in the
trackball type device control block.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Keyframe Control Block
In the keyframe control block, you can
carry out effect editing and execution.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
43
8 Effect execution direction selection buttons
0 EFF LOOP button
9 STOP NEXT KF button
1 EDIT ENBL button
4 Duration setting buttons
5 KF LOOP button
6 PAUSE button
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
EFF
LOOP
STOP
NEXT
KF
EDIT
ENBL
KF
DUR
EFF
DUR
DELAY
CONST
DUR
KF
LOOP
NORM
/REV
REV
COPY
PASTE
DEL
UNDO
FROM
TO
RUN
CTRL
INS
MOD
GOTO
KF/TC
PREV
KF
NEXT
KF
MENU
LOCAL
GLB
SRC
TRGT
AXIS
LOC
ASP
SKEW
PERS
LOC
SIZE
LOC
XYZ
ROT
SHIFT
CLR
WORK
BUFR
X
Y
Z
PAUSE
RE
WIND
RUN
3 Editing buttons
7 Effect execution section
a EDIT ENBL (edit enable) button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable
effect editing operations with the keyframe
control block.
When macro editing is carried out, this
button lights red.
b Edit point specification buttons
GO TO KF/TC (Go to keyframe/
timecode): Press this button, turning it
on, to enter a numeric value from the
numeric keypad control block, and
44
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
CTR
qa RUN CTRL button
2 Edit point specification buttons
move the edit point to the specified
keyframe.
To move the edit point to the specified
timecode position, hold down the
[SHIFT] button in the device control
block, then press this button, turning it
on, and enter the desired numeric value
from the numeric keypad control block.
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
number specified by numeric entry
with the numeric keypad control block.
PREV KF (previous keyframe): When
this button is pressed, the edit point
moves to the keyframe immediately
before the current time (the position
where the effect is currently stopped).
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
immediately before the current event.
NEXT KF (next keyframe): When this
button is pressed, the edit point moves
to the keyframe immediately after the
current time.
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
immediately after the current event.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
c Editing buttons
FROM TO: Press this button, turning it on,
to enter numeric values from the
numeric keypad control block, and
select a specified range of keyframes
(during macro editing, the specified
range of events).
INS (insert): When this button is pressed, a
new keyframe is inserted after the
current keyframe. Pressing this button
while holding down the [SHIFT]
button in the device control block
inserts a new keyframe before the
current keyframe.
During macro editing, pressing this
button moves the edit point to the event
immediately after the current event.
MOD (modify): When this button is
pressed, the selected keyframe is
modified with the values of the current
keyframe. When the edit point is
between two keyframes, the
immediately preceding keyframe is
modified. You can also select multiple
keyframes, and modify them in a single
operation. At this time, pressing this
button while holding down the
[SHIFT] button in the device control
block modifies all selected keyframes
with the changed values taken as
relative values.
During macro editing, pressing this
button amends the selected event.
DEL (delete): When this button is pressed,
the selected keyframe is deleted. When
the edit point is between two
keyframes, the immediately preceding
keyframe is deleted. During macro
editing, pressing this button deletes the
selected event. You can also select
multiple keyframes or macro events,
and delete them in a single operation.
COPY: When this button is pressed, the
selected keyframe (during macro
editing, macro event) is copied. You
can also select multiple keyframes or
macro events, and copy them in a
single operation.
PASTE: When this button is pressed, the
deleted or copied keyframe (during
macro editing, macro event) is inserted
after the current keyframe (during
macro editing, macro event). Pressing
this button while holding down the
[SHIFT] button in the device control
block inserts the deleted or copied
keyframe (during macro editing, macro
event) before the current keyframe
(during macro editing, macro event).
UNDO: When this button is pressed, the
last executed keyframe (during macro
editing, macro event) insertion,
modification, or deletion, or paste
operation is canceled.
d Duration setting buttons
KF DUR (keyframe duration): Press this
button, turning it on, to set the
keyframe duration of the selected
keyframe, by numeric value entry from
the numeric keypad control block.
EFF DUR (effect duration): Press this
button, turning it on, to set the effect
duration from the numeric keypad
control block.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
45
DELAY: Press this button, turning it on, to
enter a delay value from the numeric
keypad control block.
CONST DUR (constant duration): Select
the duration mode. When this is lit, the
mode is constant duration mode, and
when off, variable duration mode.
e KF LOOP (keyframe loop) button
Press this button, turning it on, to execute
the effect the specified number of times
through the keyframes in the specified
range.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
f PAUSE button
When this button is pressed, a pause is
applied to the selected keyframe.
When editing a macro, press this button,
turning it on, to include a pause event in the
macro. The pause length can be set in the
numeric keypad control block.
g Effect execution section
RUN: When this button is pressed, the
effect is run from the first keyframe to
the last keyframe. However, if a pause
is set on a keyframe, the effect stops at
that point. Press this button again to
resume execution, and continue to the
next pause point or the end of the
effect.
REWIND: When this button is pressed, the
currently recalled effect is rewound to
the first keyframe.
h Effect execution direction selection
buttons
REV (reverse): When this button is off,
effect execution runs from the first
keyframe to the last keyframe. When
this button is lit, effect execution runs
from the last keyframe to the first
keyframe.
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): Press this
button, turning it on, to reverse the
direction of the effect when it reaches
the last keyframe or first keyframe.
i STOP NEXT KF (stop next
keyframe) button
When this button is pressed, turning it on,
the effect execution range is from the
current time to the next keyframe.
j EFF LOOP (effect loop) button
When the effect reaches the last keyframe
with this button on, it returns to the first
keyframe and repeats.
k RUN CTRL (run control) button
When this button is on, you can execute
keyframe effects without being affected by
the STOP NEXT KF or EFF LOOP settings
in the keyframe control block.
Numeric Keypad Control Block
The numeric keypad control block is used
for region selection, for saving and
recalling snapshots, effects and shotboxes,
for entering numeric values for trackball
operation and keyframe operation, and for
transition rate entry.
46
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
1 Mode selection buttons
5 Display
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
4 Numeric keypad
3 Function selection buttons
2 Region selection buttons
a Mode selection buttons
EFF (effect): Press to save or recall an
effect.
SNAPSHOT: Press to save or recall a
snapshot.
SHOTBOX: Press to save or recall a
shotbox.
MCRO (macro): Press to save, recall or
edit a macro.
TRANS RATE (transition rate): Press to
set the transition rate.
Hold down this button, and press one of
the key row delegation buttons [KEY1]
to [KEY4] in the cross-point control
block to set an independent key
transition rate.
b Region selection buttons
These select the functional block (“region”)
of the control panel to which operations
apply.
You can select more than one region at the
same time.
The first button you press is taken as the
reference region, and lights green, while the
next pressed button lights amber.
With the exception of the [MASTER] and
[ALL] buttons, you can change the region
assignment to the buttons as desired in the
Setup menu.
MASTR: Press this, turning it on, to save
region information in a master
snapshot register or master timeline
register, or to recall such region
information.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
47
ALL: Select all regions. When any region
is already selected, pressing this button
makes all regions unselected.
M/E 1 and P/P: Select the corresponding
regions, M/E-1 and PGM/PST.
USER 1 to USER 8: Select the
corresponding User regions.
DME1 and DME2: Select a DME channel.
P-Bus: Select the P-Bus region.
GPI: Select the GPI region.
RTR: Select the router region.
DEV1 to DEV12: Select the Device 1 to
Device 12 regions respectively.
MCRO: Select the macro region.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
c Function selection buttons
UNDO: After recalling a register, press this
button to return to the state before
recalling the register.
STORE STATS (store status): This lights
amber when data is stored in a register.
After saving data to a register, hold
down this button and press the
[UNDO] button to return the register to
the state before the data was saved.
STORE: Press this button to switch to the
mode for saving a snapshot, effect,
shotbox or macro in a register.
RCALL (recall): Press this button to
switch to the mode for recalling a
snapshot, effect, shotbox or macro
from a register.
[STORE] button or [RCALL] button
flashes amber when one or more of the
regions assigned to the Region selection
buttons are not selected by the Region
Select menu.
d Numeric keypad
In addition to the buttons for numeric input,
this includes buttons for adding attributes to
snapshots.
0 to 9: Used to input numeric digits.
. (period): Enters the decimal point.
When the [TRANS RATE] button is lit,
enters “00.” When the [EFF] button,
48
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
[SNAPSHOT] button or [SHOTBOX]
button is lit, this is used to find an
empty register.
+/–/ EFF DISS (effect dissolve): Invert the
sign, negative or positive.
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,
applies the effect dissolve attribute to a
snapshot.
CLR/AUTO TRANS (clear/auto
transition): Clear an input value,
returning to the previous state.
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,
applies the auto transition attribute to a
snapshot.
TRIM/GPI ENBL (enable): After
entering a difference value to be added
to an existing setting, press this button
to confirm the change.
ENTER: Confirm an entered value.
e Display
This shows the selected region name and
entered numeric values.
Auxiliary Bus Control Block
EFF
SNAP
SHOT
+/-
7
8
9
EFF
DISS
SHOT
BOX
MCRO
MASTR
UNDO
ALL
4
TRANS
RATE
P/P
USER
1
USER
2
STORE
STATS
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
STORE
P-BUS
GP1
M/E
1
5
CLR
AUTO
6
TRANS
TRIM
1
2
3
0
M/E
1
AUX
1
GPI
ENBL
ENTER
RCALL
P/P
AUX
2
AUX
3
AUX
4
AUX
5
AUX
6
AUX
7
FMS
1
2 Bank selection buttons
a AUX delegation buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the bus to assign to the key row of the
bank selected with the bank selection
buttons. These 10 buttons from left to right
have ID numbers 1 to 10. When the
[SHIFT] button is enabled, their ID
numbers switch to 11 to 20. Pressing one of
the buttons selects the bus assigned to the
ID number. That is, you can select up to 20
buses using these AUX delegation buttons
in combination with the [SHIFT] button.
The assignment of buses to the ID numbers
can be done in a Setup menu.
For buses that can be selected, see “Bus
Selection” (page 97).
For each bank, the key row is shared
between the auxiliary bus control block and
cross-point control block. Priority is given
to the control block in which the delegation
EDIT
PVW
KEY
SHIFT
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
1 AUX delegation buttons
FMS
2
4 SHIFT button
3 KEY button
button is last pressed. When priority is
given to the cross-point control block, all
these buttons go off.
b Bank selection buttons
These select the bank for which the AUX
delegation buttons are enabled.
c KEY button
While this button is held down, you can use
the cross-point row of buttons to select key
signals.
d SHIFT button
While this button is enabled, the AUX
delegation buttons have the shifted ID
numbers. In a Setup menu, you can select
one of the following three modes for this
button.
• The button takes effect while being held
down.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
49
• Every time the button is pressed, it
toggles between the shifted and unshifted
states for the AUX delegation buttons.
• The button does not take effect even
when pressed.
Menu Control Block
1 Top menu selection buttons
HOME
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
SUB
MENU
SITE
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
COPY
SWAP
MISC
DME
GLB
EFF
RTR
DEV
2 Menu display
P/P
MCRO
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
KEY
FRAME
EFF
SNAP
SHOT
FILE
USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP
DIAG
PREFS
1
PREFS
2
PREFS
3
PREFS
4
SHOT
BOX
PREFS
5
PREFS
6
PREFS
7
PREFS
8
4 User preference buttons
a Top menu selection buttons
These select the menu appearing in the
menu display.
It is also possible to change the assignment
of these buttons in setup.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).
3 Knobs
HOME
M/E
1
SUB
MENU
SITE
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
COPY
SWAP
MISC
STATS
DME
GLB
EFF
P/P
RTR
CCR
DEV
MCRO
KEY
FRAME
EFF
SNAP
SHOT
SHOT
BOX
FILE
USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP
DIAG
b Menu display
This shows the menu currently in use.
c Knobs
These adjust the parameter values
appearing in the menu.
50
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
d User preference buttons
These recall the functions or menus
assigned to them in the Setup menu.
In the default setup, nothing is assigned to
the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 8] buttons.
It is also possible to change the assignment
of these buttons in setup.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block
3 Memory card access indicator
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
2 DEVICE connector
1 Memory card slot
a Memory card slot
This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II
compliant memory card. You can use it in
software installation, and for saving and
reading in data, such as snapshot, keyframe,
effect, and setup data.
Note
When the indicator is lit, do not take out the
memory card.
b DEVICE connectors
This is a USB connector.
You can connect a device such as a mouse,
keyboard, USB storage, and so on, that is
equipped with a USB interface to any of
these connectors.
For details on the devices that can be
connected, consult your Sony
representative.
c Memory card access indicator
This indicator lights when the memory card
is accessed for reading or writing.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
51
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block
1 “Memory Stick” status indicator
2 “Memory Stick” slot
A
POWER
3 DEVICE connector
B
4 POWER A, B status indicators
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a “Memory Stick” status indicator
Lights in red during access to a “Memory
Stick.”
Note
Do not power the unit off or remove a
“Memory Stick” when the “Memory Stick”
status indicator is lit.
b “Memory Stick” slot
Insert “Memory Sticks.” You can use it in
software installation, and for saving and
reading data, such as snapshot, keyframe,
effect, and setup data.
See the next item, “Memory Sticks” for
more information about the usable
“Memory Sticks” and their handling.
c DEVICE connectors
There is a USB connector.
You can connect a device such as a mouse,
keyboard, USB storage, and so on, that is
equipped with a USB interface to any of
these connectors.
For details on the devices that can be
connected, consult your Sony
representative.
52
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
d POWER A, B status indicators
The status indicators light in green when
the unit is powered on.
The POWER B status indicator does not
light when the optional HK-PSU11 Power
Supply Unit is not supplied in the factory
configuration.
About “Memory Sticks”
Usable “Memory Sticks”
This unit has been confirmed to operate
with those of the following “Memory
Sticks” that have a capacity of 8 GB
(gigabytes) or less. However, operation
with all “Memory Sticks” is not guaranteed.
• “Memory Stick”
• “Memory Stick PRO”
• “Memory Stick Duo”
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo”
Notes
• When using a “Memory Stick PRO,”
high-rate data transfer using parallel
interface is not supported.
• A “MagicGate Memory Stick” can also
be used, but this system does not support
the MagicGate function.
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be
sure to use it with a “Memory Stick Duo
Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or equivalent). If
you insert a “Memory Stick Duo”
without using the adaptor, there is the
possibility that the stick cannot be
removed, resulting in a serious accident.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Handling “Memory Sticks”
When using “Memory Sticks,” pay
attention to the following points.
• Do not touch the connector of the
“Memory Stick” with anything, including
your finger or metallic objects.
• Do not attach anything other than the
supplied label to the “Memory Stick”
labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick
out beyond the labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its
case.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory
Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify the
“Memory Stick.”
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get
wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick”
in a location that is:
– Extremely hot, such as in a car parked
in the sun
– Under direct sunlight
– Very humid or subject to corrosive
substances
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
53
Key Control Block (MKS-8035 Key Control Module,
Option)
Each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks
includes four keyers (for keys 1 to 4), and
you can delegate this control block to any
desired keyer. In this control block, you can
adjust and modify keys.
3 Key fill/key source selection buttons
2 Key type selection buttons
1 Delegation buttons
q; ON AIR indicators
8 Displays
qg RESIZER button
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
9 DME channel
selection buttons
6 SHOW KEY button
7 Knobs
qf AUTO DELEG button
qa Output destination specification
buttons
qd TRACE button
4 Key modifier buttons
qs OVERRIDE button
5 MORE button
a Delegation buttons
Key delegation: Press one of the [KEY1]
to [KEY4] buttons to delegate the key
54
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
control block to the corresponding
keyer.
M/E delegation: Press one of the [M/E 1]
to [M/E 3], and [P/P] buttons to select
the bank (the M/E bank or PGM/PST
bank) to which the key control block is
delegated.
Notes
• When the MKS-9011 1M/E Control
Panel is used, only the [P/P] is enabled.
When the MKS-9012 2M/E Control
Panel is used, only the [M/E-1] and [P/P]
are enabled.
• With the MKS-9011/9012, you cannot
directly control DME5 to DME8.
b Key type selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the desired key type.
Depending on the selected key type,
various parameters are displayed, and you
can set the values with the knobs.
The following key types can be selected.
LUM: luminance key
LIN: linear key
CRK: chroma key
CVK: color vector key
PTN: key wipe pattern key
For details, see “Key Types” (page 141).
c Key fill/key source selection buttons
AUTO SEL (selection): Use the signal
selected on the key fill bus, and the
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
TRANS: By pressing this button, you can
check the DME channel used for DME
wipes on the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Also, by pressing this button, then
pressing one of the DME channel
selection buttons, you can preset the
DME channel to be used when a DME
wipe is selected as the transition type
for the next transition.
When presetting the DME channel for
an independent key transition, hold
down this button, then press one of the
[KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons, turning the
two buttons on, beforehand.
paired key source signal. The setting of
key fill and key source pairs is carried
out in a Setup menu.
SPLIT: To use the signal selected on the
key fill bus as key fill, and a signal
separate from the signal assigned in a
pair with key fill for key source, press
this button, turning it on.
To use the signal selected on the key fill bus
as key source (self keying), press the
[AUTO SEL] button and [SPLIT] button at
the same time, so that both are off.
MATTE FILL: To use a color matte from
the internal generator as key fill, press
this button, turning it on. You can
adjust the color matte using the knobs.
When this button is off, the signal
selected on the key fill bus is used as
key fill.
d Key modifier buttons
To add an edge modifier to the key, press
one of these buttons, turning it on.
Depending on the edge type selected,
parameters appear in the displays, and you
can set the values with the knobs.
For functions other than MASK, keys 3 and
4 cannot be used.
KEY DROP: When the selected edge type
is “normal” and soft edge is not
selected or when drop border or
shadow is selected, turning this button
on lowers the key fill and key source
position by four or eight scan lines as
set in the key menu.
To select 4H or 8H, use the Key menu.
When the selected edge type is
“normal” and soft edge is selected or
when border, outline, or emboss is
selected, this button lights
automatically.
BDR (border): Apply a border of a
uniform thickness to the whole key.
DROP BDR (drop border): Apply a
border to two sides of the key (for
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
55
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
example, below and to the right, or
below and to the left).
SHDW (shadow): Apply a shadow to two
sides of the key (for example, below
and to the right, or below and to the
left).
OUTLINE: Use the outline of the key.
EMBOS (emboss): Apply an embossing
effect to the periphery of the key.
• To select a “normal” as the edge type
(that is, a plain edge), set all five of the
above buttons off.
• When emboss is selected, you can use the
dedicated color matte signal for the
emboss function.
• When outline is selected, the signal
selected on the key fill bus is used to fill
the edge.
MASK: Press this button, turning it on, to
enable the key mask using the mask. It
also enables you to set the parameters
with the knobs.
ZABTN (zabton): When this is pressed,
turning it on, a translucent pattern is
inserted behind the key. With the
knobs, you can adjust the color, size,
density, and softness parameters.
SOFT EDGE: Soften the edge of the key.
e MORE button
When there are more than four parameters,
this button lights amber. When it is pressed,
it changes from amber to green and the fifth
and subsequent parameters are assigned to
the knobs, allowing them to be adjusted.
f SHOW KEY button
While this button is held down, a key
processed key source signal is output from
the specified output port. You can make the
output specification independently for each
of edit preview and the preview of the M/E
or PGM/PST bank in a Setup menu.
56
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
g Knobs
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter
values.
h Displays
Each display shows the initial letters of the
parameter name and the parameter value
(maximum three digits including a minus
sign for a negative value).
i DME channel selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
assign a DME channel to the keyer.
DME1 and DME2 can be assigned to one
keyer.
A DME channel assigned to a keyer cannot
be selected on another keyer. However,
using the override function it is possible to
allocate a channel already allocated to
another keyer to the currently selected
keyer. If DME channel allocations have
been made in a Setup menu, these buttons
cannot be used to make DME channel
allocations. Using the trace function, it is
possible to check which keyer a DME
channel is allocated to.
j ON AIR indicators
These light red when the corresponding
DME channels are included in the final
program output.
k Output destination specification
buttons
MON (DME monitor): Hold down this
button and press the selection button
for the DME channel you want to
assign to the monitor output; you can
then monitor the output signal on the
DME monitor output.
While this button is held down, the
DME channel selection buttons light as
follows, allowing you to check the
monitor assignment.
Lit amber: DME channel that can
currently be monitored
Lit green: DME channel currently
assigned to the monitor output
l OVERRIDE button
To select a DME channel already allocated
to another keyer or transition to the
currently selected keyer (or transition), hold
down this button, and press the DME
channel selection button.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
m TRACE button
When a DME channel is already allocated
to another keyer or transition, hold down
this button, and press the corresponding
DME channel selection button, to switch to
the state in which the keyer (or transition) to
which the DME channel is allocated is
currently selected.
n AUTO DELEG (auto delegation)
button
When this button is on, the key delegation
selection state of the key control block is
linked to the next transition selection state
of the transition control block.
o RESIZER button
Enables or disables resizer.
For details on resizer, see page 186.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
57
Device Control Block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module,
Option)
The device control block is used for threedimensional transform operations using a
DME, for wipe pattern position setting, and
for VTR/disk recorder or frame memory
clip operations.
5 MENU button
1 Region selection buttons
3 Trackball
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
2 Operating buttons
a Region selection buttons
The operation mode allocated to the device
control block depends on the selection state
of the region selection buttons.
When the [M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], and
[P/P] buttons are selected: This
enables the wipe pattern position
setting (positioner) operation mode in
the device control block. You can
select multiple buttons simultaneously.
When the MKS-9011 1M/E Control
Panel is used, only the [P/P] is enabled.
When the MKS-9012 2M/E Control
58
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
4 Z-ring
Panel is used, only the [M/E-1] and [P/
P] are enabled.
When the [USER] button is selected: This
enables pattern position setting used
for color backgrounds.
When the [DME1], [DME2], and
[DME5] to [DME 8] buttons are
selected: This enables the threedimensional transform operation mode
in the device control block.
Press a button, turning it on, to select a
DME channel. You can select multiple
buttons simultaneously.
For details on resizer, see page 186.
The functions of the operation buttons,
trackball, and Z-ring vary with the
operation mode as follows.
b Operation buttons
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
K1 CB1: Press this button to enable wipe
pattern position setting for key 1
(DSK1).
When the [USER] button is selected,
pattern position setting for color
background 1 is enabled.
K2: Press this button to enable wipe pattern
position setting for key 2 (DSK2).
K3: Press this button to enable wipe pattern
position setting for key 3 (DSK3).
K4: Press this button to enable wipe pattern
position setting for key 4 (DSK4).
WIPE: Press this button to enable wipe
pattern position setting for normal
transitions.
Among the [K1 CB1] button, [K2] button,
[K3] button, [K4] button, and [WIPE]
button, you can select multiple buttons.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
With the MKS-9011/9012 control
panel, you cannot directly control
DME5 to DME8.
When the [DEV] button is selected: This
enables the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode in the device
control block. Each button functions as
follows.
(From upper left to right in the above
figure)
[M/E1] to [M/E3]: DEV1 (device 1) to
DEV3 (device 3)
[P/P]: DEV4 (device 4)
[USER]: FM1CLIP (frame memory
clip 1)
[Unused]: FM2CLIP (frame memory
clip 2)
[DME1]: DEV5 (device 5)
[DME2]: DEV6 (device 6)
[Unused]: DEV7 (device 7)
[Unused]: DEV8 (device 8)
[Unused]: FM LOOP (frame memory
loop)
[DME5] to [DME8]: DEV9 (device 9)
to DEV12 (device 12)
To exit from this mode, press the
[DEV] button again, turning it off.
When the [RUN CTRL] button is
selected: This enables the effect run
control mode in the device control
block.
When the [RSZR CTRL] button is
selected: This enables the resizer
control mode in the device control
block.
POS: Press this button to enable pattern
movement in the x-axis and y-axis
directions with the trackball.
When the [USER] button is selected,
this enables the trackball to move the
pattern in the x-axis and y-axis
directions, and the Z-ring to adjust the
size of the pattern.
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.
CTR (center): When this button is pressed,
the pattern position returns to the
center. When the [USER] button is
selected, the pattern size also returns to
50.00.
SHIFT/CLR WORK BUFR: These are
not used in positioner operation mode.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
The Buttons are used for three-dimensional
DME transformations.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
59
For details, see “Basic Operations” in
Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled
The Buttons are used for VTR control or
playback of frame memory clips.
For details, see “Controlling the Tape/Disk
Transport” in Chapter 12 (Volume 2).
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
When the resizer control mode is enabled
LOCAL (K1): Select key 1.
GLB (K2): Select key 2.
LOC SIZE (ASP: aspect): Pressing this
button and operating the trackball or Zring changes the aspect ratio of a key to
which the resizer function is applied to.
When this button is held down, the
trackball or Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
LOC XYZ (LOC: location): Pressing this
button and operating the trackball or Zring moves, shrinks, or magnifies a key
to which the resizer function is applied
to. When this button is held down, the
trackball or Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
ROT (RSZE: resizer): Press this button,
turning it on, to enable the resizer.
CLR WORK BUFR (clear work buffer):
Pressing this button once returns the
two-dimensional transformation
settings to the defaults. Pressing twice
in rapid succession returns all resizer
parameter values to the defaults.
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.
CTR (center): Pressing this button once
changes the two-dimensional
transformation settings to the closest
detent values. Pressing twice in rapid
succession returns the two-dimensional
transformation settings to the defaults.
60
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
c Trackball
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
By moving this, you can move the pattern
in the x-axis and y-axis directions.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
Move the trackball to control the x- and yaxes in a three-dimensional transform.
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held
down, the trackball operation is switched to
a finer control. (fine mode)
When the resizer control mode is
enabled
By turning the trackball, you can move in
the x- and y-directions of the key to which
the resizer is applied, and change the aspect
ratio.
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]
button is held down, the trackball operation
is switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
d Z-ring
When the positioner operation mode is
enabled
When the [USER] button is selected, by
turning the ring you can adjust the size of
the pattern.
When the three-dimensional transform
operation mode is enabled
Turn this ring to control the z-axis in a
three-dimensional transform.
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held
down, the Z-ring operation is switched to a
finer control. (fine mode)
When the effect run control mode is
enabled
By turning the Z-ring, you can run the
keyframe effect, independent of the STOP
NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar settings
in the keyframe control block. Turn
clockwise to run the effect in the normal
direction, and counterclockwise for the
reverse direction.
normal direction, and counterclockwise for
the reverse direction.
When the resizer control mode is enabled
By turning the ring, you can zoom the key
to which the resizer is applied, and change
the aspect ratio.
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]
button is held down, the Z-ring operation is
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)
e MENU button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable
adjusting the parameters allocated to the
knobs in the menu using the trackball and
Z-ring.
In the case of the DME menu, the operation
applies to the selected DME channel.
In VTR/disk recorder/frame memory
operation mode, press this button, setting it
to On, to make it possible to carry out
timeline start/stop point setting operation
for the device selected with the device
selection buttons (timeline setting mode).
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame
memory operation mode is enabled
Turning the Z-ring controls the tape
transport/disk drive/frame memory clip
operations, at a speed determined by the
operating buttons. Turn clockwise for the
Device Control Block (MKS-8036A Search Dial Module,
Option)
Using the device control block (MKS8036A search dial module 1), option), you
can directly operate an XDCAM, disk
recorder, VTR or other external device,
frame memory clip, or shotbox. The device
control block (MKS-8031TB track ball
module, option) can be used together.
1) The product name of the MKS-8036A is “device
control module,” but in this manual it is referred to
as “search dial module” to distinguish it from the
MKS-8031TB trackball module.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
61
4 DELAY button
7 TIMELINE button
2 Device selection buttons
8 STOP button
6 External device
operation buttons
1 Timecode display
CURRENT
TIME
LINE
SHTL
JOG
VAR
ENBL
START TC
STOP
STOP TC
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
DEV
1
DEV
2
DEV
3
DEV
4
DEV
5
DEV
6
DELAY
FM1
CLIP
FM2
CLIP
SBOX
1
SBOX
2
SBOX
3
START
TC
STOP
TC
SET
START
TC
SET
STOP
TC
SET
DUR
STB
OFF
CUE
REW
PLAY
FF
ALL
STOP
REC
5 Editing
buttons
a Timecode display
This shows the current time (CURRENT)
and the start and stop point timecode values
for the current reference device (START
TC, STOP TC). When you press a device
selection button, the button lights, selecting
the assigned device as the reference device,
and displaying its setting value.
In the case of the [SBOX] buttons, the
display does not change. The displayed
setting value depends on whether the
[TIMELINE] button is on or off, as follows.
When the [TIMELINE] button is on:
Displays the start and stop points of the
last set keyframe on the timeline. When
the keyframe number is changed and
the last register and keyframe change,
the display also changes. (timeline
setting mode)
selected button, the second button will be
62
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
9 Search dial
3 SBOX buttons
When the [TIMELINE] button is off:
Displays the Cueup & Play (rewind
action) start and stop points.
b Device selection buttons
These buttons are used for selecting
assigned external devices or frame memory
clips. Each button can only be assigned to a
single device. Carry out the assignment in
the Setup menu (see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
19 (Volume 3)). To select an assigned
device, press the corresponding button,
which lights green. To select more than one
device simultaneously, hold down the
button for the first selection, while pressing
the buttons for the other selections in turn.
The second and subsequent selected
buttons light amber. If you press another
button without holding down the first
the reference device and light green.
DEV: Assign external devices DEV1 to
DEV12.
FM CLIP: Assign frame memory clips
FM1 to FM8.
Device selection buttons can be set as
SBOX buttons or DELAY button in the
Setup menu.
d DELAY button
When pressed, this button lights green, the
numeric keypad control block display
changes to DELAY__ : , and you can set
the start delay time for the selected device.
The setting range is from 00:00 to 59:29
(depends on the video format). This button
goes off when another timecode setting
button ([START TC], [STOP TC], [SET
START TC], [SET STOP TC], or [SET
DUR]) is pressed.
The DELAY button can be set as a device
selection button or an SBOX button in the
Setup menu. Carry out the assignment in
the Setup menu (see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
19 (Volume 3)).
e Editing buttons
These carry out Cueup & Play (rewind
action) operations on material, and timeline
settings. These operations are only valid
while a device is selected with the device
selection buttons.
START TC: When pressed, this button
flashes amber, and sounds a beep,
setting the timecode at that time as the
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
c SBOX (shotbox) buttons
Assign a shotbox saved in registers 1 to 99.
When you press a button, the assigned
shotbox is selected, and executed.
SBOX buttons can be set as device
selection buttons or DELAY button in the
Setup menu. Carry out the assignment in
the Setup menu (see “Overall Control
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter
19 (Volume 3)).
device start point (on the timeline when
the [TIMELINE] button is On, and
Cueup & Play start point when Off). If
you press once more, the timecode at
that time is overwritten as a new start
point.
STOP TC: When pressed, this button
flashes amber, and sounds a beep,
setting the timecode at that time as the
device stop point (on the timeline when
the [TIMELINE] button is On, and
Cueup & Play stop point when Off). If
you press once more, the timecode at
that time is overwritten as a new stop
point.
SET START TC, SET STOP TC, SET
DUR: When pressed, these buttons
light green, “START TC”, “STOP TC”
or “DUR” appears in the numeric
keypad control block display, and you
can enter a timecode from the numeric
keypad. If you enter a numeric value
and press the [ENTER] button, the
button goes off, whereas if you press
the [ENTER] button without entering a
numeric value the numeric keypad
control block display shows
“--:--:--:--”. To exit the numeric value
entry mode, either repeat pressing the
same button, or press a different
numeric keypad control block linked
button, or a mode selection button such
as the [EFF] and [SNAPSHOT]
buttons in the numeric keypad control
block. If the timecode has been set
correctly, the entered numeric value
appears in the timecode display.
STB (standby) OFF: When pressed, this
button flashes amber, and the device
selected with the device selection
buttons exits from the standby mode.
This button cannot be used for frame
memory clip operations.
CUE: When pressed, this button flashes
amber together with the [ALL STOP]
63
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
button, and the device selected with the
device selection button is cued up to the
start point of the material. When more
than one device is selected, the amber
flashing continues until the reference
device is cued up, and when the cueing
up is finished, this button lights green.
REW: When pressed, this button lights
amber, and material of the device
selected with the device selection
buttons is rewound. To stop during the
rewind, press the [STOP] button or
[ALL STOP] button.
PLAY: When pressed, this button lights
amber, and the device selected with the
device selection buttons plays. The
playback stops not only if the [STOP]
button is pressed, but also if any of the
[STB OFF], [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [PLAY], [FF], and [ALL
STOP] buttons is pressed. When the
[VAR] button is pressed while the
device is playing back, the device plays
at one times normal speed in variable
mode.
FF: When pressed, this button lights amber,
and the material of the device selected
with the device selection buttons is fast
forwarded. To stop during the fast
forward, press the [STOP] button or
[ALL STOP] button.
ALL STOP: When pressed, all device
material playback and other operations
stop. During cueing up of any of the
devices, this button flashes amber, and
when all cueing up operations are
completed, it lights green.
REC: When pressed simultaneously with
the [PLAY] button, this button lights
red (the [PLAY] button lights amber),
and the image from the selected device
is recorded.
This button cannot be used for frame
memory clip operations.
64
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
f External device operation buttons
ENBL (enable): When this is pressed,
turning it on, the search dial [VAR],
[JOG], and [SHTL] button operations
are enabled.
VAR (variable): Sets the search dial to
variable mode.
JOG: Sets the search dial to jog mode.
SHTL (shuttle): Sets the search dial to
shuttle mode.
g TIMELINE button
Press to switch the device selected with the
device selection buttons to timeline setting
mode.
h STOP button
When pressed, this lights amber, and
operation of the device selected with the
device selection buttons stops.
i Search dial
Use this for search and other operations on
the material of an external device.
For details of the method of use, see
“Controlling Tape/Disk Transport” in
Chapter 12 (Volume 2).
Utility/Shotbox Control Block (MKS-8033 Utility/
Shotbox Module, Option)
1 Bank selection buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
BANK
2
7
8
9
10
11
12
BANK
3
13
14
15
16
17
18
BANK
4
19
20
21
22
23
24
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
BANK
1
2 Memory recall buttons
a Bank selection buttons
Press any of the [BANK1] to [BANK4]
buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall
buttons. The selected button lights amber.
b Memory recall buttons
You can use these buttons to recall
frequently used menus, utility functions,
shotbox registers, or macro registers that
you have assigned.
When a utility function is allocated to a
button, the button lights orange (or green
depending on the status), and the allocated
function name appears. Pressing the button
executes the allocated function. When the
function constitutes a switching on/off
operation, the button lights green;
otherwise, it only momentarily lights green.
When a shotbox register or macro register
recall is assigned to a button, the button
lights orange, and the assigned register
name appears. (If the register is empty, the
button goes off.) In the case of a shotbox
function, pressing the button executes the
assigned shotbox function, and the button
lights yellow. In the case of a macro
register, pressing the button executes the
assigned macro, and the button flashes
yellow.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
65
Downstream Key Control Block (MKS-8032 DSK Fader
Module, Option)
1 Key delegation buttons
5 Key source name display/key snapshot
buttons
4 Key snapshot setting
buttons
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
DSK1
DSK2
UNDO
WIPE
DME
K-SS
DSK3
DSK4
SHIFT
MIX
CUT
K-SS
STORE
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
DSK3
ON
DSK4
ON
TAKE
TAKE
TAKE
TAKE
2 Independent key transition type
selection buttons
3 Independent key transition execution section
a Key delegation buttons
Press one of the [DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons
to delegate this control block to the
corresponding keyer.
When the MKS-9012 2M/E Control Panel
is used, it is possible to delegate this control
block to key 1 to key 4 of the M/E bank
using a Setup menu.
b Independent key transition type
selection buttons
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to
select the downstream key transition type.
66
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
MIX: Carry out a dissolve with the key
selected with the key delegation
buttons.
WIPE: Carry out a wipe with the key
selected with the key delegation
buttons.
DME: This switches the key selected with
the key delegation buttons, using a
DME wipe.
CUT: Instantaneously insert or delete the
key selected with the key delegation
buttons.
SHIFT: When setting is made in the Setup
menu to allow a different transition
type for inserting or deleting a key, it is
possible to display and set the
transition after the next transition while
this button is held down.
the selected keyer, and pressing the button
saves or recalls a key snapshot.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
c Independent key transition
execution section
DSK1 (downstream key 1) ON to DSK4
ON buttons: Press these to
instantaneously cut the downstream
keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 in or, when the
downstream keys are already inserted,
cut them out. When the key
corresponding to the button appears in
the final program output, the button
lights red, and otherwise lights amber.
TAKE buttons: These correspond to
downstream keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 from
left to right; press to execute an auto
transition. The transition starts
immediately, and the button lights
amber. When the transition completes,
the button goes off.
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a
manual downstream key transition.
Transition indicator: This comprises
multiple LEDs, which show the
progress of the downstream key
transition.
d Key snapshot setting buttons
K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key
snapshot mode.
K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To
save a key snapshot, hold down this
button, and press the key source name
display/key snapshot button for the
register you want to save.
UNDO (key snapshot recall undo): This
undoes the last key snapshot recall.
e Key source name display/key
snapshot buttons
These display the selected source name for
each corresponding keyer. In snapshot
mode, they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel
67
Basic Menu Operations
Menu Organization
Operations on the MVS-6000 switcher
system make frequent use of menu
operations.
This section describes the menus and their
interrelationships.
Overview
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
All detailed settings for basic operations
such as transitions, keys, DME, or wipes,
are made in menus. There are also menus
for carrying out general system control,
managing setting data, and initial setup.
About the Top Menu List
When the control panel is powered on, the
top menu list appears as shown below.
You can also display this by selecting VF1
‘Top Menu List’ after pressing the [HOME]
button at the upper left in the top menu
selection button area of the menu control
block.
To display the top menu
In the same way as for the top menu
selection buttons in the menu control block,
press each button to display the particular
top menu in the menu display.
The top menu list button is the same as the
default layout of the top menu selection
buttons. However, even if the assignment of
the top menu selection buttons is changed,
this does not affect the top menu list.
To shut down the menus
Press the [Shutdown] button at the lower
right.
This operation is the same as the shut down
operation in the top menu window.
For details, see “Shutting down the menus”
(page 87).
Accessing Menus
You can use any of the following methods
to access a menu, and the initially displayed
68
Basic Menu Operations
menu page depends on the method used.
• Pressing a top menu selection button in
the menu control block.
This displays the page you last accessed
in the particular menu. After initially
powering on the system, however, the
page of VF1 - HF1 of the particular menu
is always selected.
• Pressing a button other than a top menu
button twice in rapid succession (see
page 71).
Depending on the button, this may
display a fixed page or the page selected
last time you accessed the menu.
• Press the menu page selection button at
the top left of the menu display.
The top menu window appears; press the
top menu selection button for the
particular menu, or enter the menu
number with the numeric keypad, and
press the Enter button.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
For details of the VF buttons and HF
buttons, see “Interpreting the Menu
Screen” (page 75).
Basic Menu Operations
69
Menus accessed from a top menu selection button
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
70
Buttons
Menus
Function
See
HOME
Home
Recalling menus using the top
menu list or shortcut menu
Top menu list: page 68 Shortcut
menu: page 89
M/E 1
M/E-1
Transition, keys, and wipe
settings for the M/E-1 bank
page 114 (transitions), page
142 (keys), page 201 (wipes)
P/P
PGM/PST
Transition, downstream key, and
wipe settings for the PGM/PST
bank
FRAME
MEM
Frame Memory
Frame memory settings
page 259
COLOR
BKGD
Color Bkgd
Color background settings
page 308
AUX/MON
Aux/Mon
AUX bus settings
page 323
CCR
CCR
Color corrector settings
page 331
COPY
SWAP
Copy/Swap
Copy and swap settings
page 312
MISC
Misc
Safe title settings
page 320
STATS
Status
Status display
page 324
DME
DME
DME special effect settings
Chapter 11 (Volume 2)
GLB EFF
Global Effect
Global effect settings
Chapter 11 (Volume 2)
RTR
Router
Destination, source and level
selections
page 325
DEV
Device
Settings for external device
operation
Chapter 12 (Volume 2)
MCRO
Macro
Macro register settings
Chapter 16 (Volume 2)
KEY
FRAME
Key Frame
Keyframe settings
Chapter 13 (Volume 2)
EFF
Effect
Keyframe effect register settings
Chapter 13 (Volume 2)
SNAP
SHOT
Snapshot
Snapshot register settings
Chapter 14 (Volume 2)
SHOTBOX
Shotbox
Shotbox register settings
Chapter 15 (Volume 2)
FILE
File
File settings
Chapter 17 (Volume 2)
ENG
SETUP
Engineering Setup
Setup functions
Chapter 18 to Chapter 24
(Volume 3)
DIAG
Diagnosis
Status information display
Appendix (Volume 3)
Basic Menu Operations
Menus accessed by pressing a button twice
For relevant buttons other than the top
menu selection buttons, pressing twice in
rapid succession directly recalls a related
menu page. The following table lists these
buttons of each control block, together with
the menus they recall. (XX represents the
HF menu recalled last in the VF menu.)
Cross-point control block
Buttons
Menus
See
FM1 to 8 signals assigned
buttons
Frame Memory >Still >Recall
page 269
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1
page 308
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX
Chapter 19
(Volume 3)
DME >XX
Chapter 11
(Volume 2)
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to
DSK4)
• M/E-1 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >XX
page 148
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
DME1 to DME2
Transition control block
Buttons
Menus
See
KEY1 (DSK1)
• M/E-1 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 148
KEY2 (DSK2)
• M/E-1 >Key2 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
KEY3 (DSK3)
• M/E-1 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
KEY4 (DSK4)
• M/E-1 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
WIPE
M/E-1, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern
page 201
DME
M/E-1, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX
page 232
SUPER MIX
M/E-1, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition
page 115
PST COLOR MIX
M/E-1, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition
page 116
FM1&2 CLIP,
FM3&4 CLIP,
FM5&6 CLIP,
FM7&8 CLIP
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >ClipTransition
page 296
PRIOR SET
M/E-1, PGM/PST >Misc >Key Priority
page 111
KEY PRIOR
M/E-1, PGM/PST >Misc >Next Key Priority
page 112
Basic Menu Operations
71
Key control block a)
Buttons
Menus
See
KEY1
• M/E-1 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 148
KEY2
• M/E-1 > Key2 > XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
KEY3
• M/E-1 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
KEY4
• M/E-1 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
LUM
• M/E-1 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type
page 149
• M/E-1 >Key 1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust
page 154
LIN
CVK
PTN
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
CRK
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E delegation buttons and key delegation buttons
are selected in the key control block.
Numeric keypad control block
Buttons
Menus
See
EFF
• Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX b)
• Effect >Master Timeline >Store c)
Chapter 13
(Volume 2)
SNAPSHOT
• Snapshot >Snapshot >XX b)
• Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store c)
Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
SHOTBOX
Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall
Chapter 15
(Volume 2)
MCRO
Macro >Register >XX
Chapter 16
(Volume 2)
TRANS RATE a)
Misc >Transition
page 122
STORE RCALL
Key Frame >Region Select d)
Chapter 13
(Volume 2)
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E-1 bank and PGM/PST bank the numeric
control block is delegated to.
b) When other than [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.
c) When [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.
d) When the [SNAPSHOT] button or [EFF] button is set to On, or lit green.
72
Basic Menu Operations
Downstream key control block a)
Menus
See
DSK1
• M/E-1 >Key1 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX
page 148
DSK2
• M/E-1 >Key2 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX
DSK3
• M/E-1 >Key3 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX
DSK4
• M/E-1 >Key4 >XX
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX
WIPE
• M/E-1 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust
>Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 213
DME
• M/E-1 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust
>Pattern Select
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe
Adjust >Pattern Select
page 242
K-SS STORE b)
Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX
Chapter 14
(Volume 2)
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Buttons
a) The menu recalled depends on which of keyers 1 to 4 the downstream key control block is
delegated to.
b) Recalling is possible only when the [K-SS] button is On.
Auxiliary bus control block
Buttons
Menus
FMS1, FMS2
Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store
page 265
FM1 to 8 signals assigned
buttons
Frame Memory >Still >Recall
page 269
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned
button
Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1
page 308
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX
See
page 331
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX
Device control block (trackball)
Buttons
Menus
See
DME1, DME2
DME >XX
Chapter 11
(Volume 2)
DEV1 to DEV12 assigned
buttons
• Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play b)
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline c)
Chapter 12
(Volume 2)
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP
assigned buttons
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall
page 284
Basic Menu Operations
73
Device control block (trackball)
Buttons
Menus
See
K1, K2
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key
page 186
a) When the [MENU] button is Off.
b) When the [MENU] button is On.
Device control block (search dial)
Buttons
Menus
See
DEV1 to DEV12
• Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play a)
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline b)
Chapter 12
(Volume 2)
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP
assigned buttons
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall
page 284
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) When the [TIMELINE] button is Off.
b) When the [TIMELINE] button is On.
Displaying a Menu
To display, for example, the M/E-1 >Key1
>Type menu, use either of the following
operations.
• Press the top menu selection button [M/E
1], then press the VF1 ‘Key1’ button and
the HF1 ‘Type’ button in that order.
• Press the menu page number button in the
upper left corner of the menu screen to
display the top menu window, then enter
the page number of the M/E-1 >Key1
>Type menu, which is 1111, and press
the [Enter] button.
For details of the menu page numbers, see
“Menu Tree” (page 372).
The M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu appears in
the menu display as follows.
74
Basic Menu Operations
5 Status area
qs b (previous) button and B (next)
button
6 Function button area
2 Menu page number button
7 Parameter group button
1 Menu title
button
0 Keyframe status
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
qa Default recall button
4 HF buttons
3 VF buttons
8 Knob
parameter
buttons
9 Previous page button
M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu
Interpreting the Menu
Screen
The menu screen consists of the following
principal parts.
When buttons on the screen are lit or
represented in a depressed state, this
indicates that the corresponding item or
function is selected (set on).
a Menu title button
This shows the title of the menu screen.
You can set different colors for the main
menu site and subsidiary menu site (see
page 89).
b Menu page number button
This shows the menu screen page number.
When you press this button, the top menu
window (see page 86) appears. You can
enter the page number for the desired menu,
Basic Menu Operations
75
or press one of the top menu selection
buttons in the window, to display that
menu.
While the system is accessing the hard disk,
the indicator lights red.
Indicator for frame
memory external hard disk
Indicator for internal hard
disk
Note
When the indicator is lit, do not power off
the switcher, or disconnect the IEEE1394
cable 1).
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
1) When an external hard disk drive is connected
c VF buttons
These indicate the larger subdivisions of
this menu.
Depending on the selected item, the menu
screen contents including the HF button
indications change.
d HF buttons
These indicate the items within the menu.
Depending on the selected item, the menu
indications change.
Depending on the function, if any one is on,
the status is shown by an orange bar, as in
the following figure.
e Status area
This shows the status of the settings items
controlled by the selected menu.
An orange frame appears around the
parameter area relating to the displayed
menu. For each of the twelve areas,
76
Basic Menu Operations
pressing the display jumps to the related
menu.
f Function button area
This shows the functions which can be
operated in the currently selected menu by
means of buttons.
Each function button corresponds to a
function which can be set in the currently
selected menu. Press it to enable the
function, to display a parameter group and
adjust the parameters with the knobs, or to
execute the function.
These buttons are in groups by function. In
the screen example shown on the previous
page, the [Key Bus] and [Matte] function
buttons constitute the <Key Fill> group.
g Parameter group button
This displays parameter group names for
which the knobs can make adjustments, the
current parameter setting page number, and
the total number of the parameter setting
pages. (Example: Color Vector 1/2)
When there are more than five parameters
within the same parameter group, press this
button to display the sixth and subsequent
parameters, which can then be controlled
by the knobs.
h Knob parameter buttons
These show the parameters currently
controlled by the knobs and their values.
Pressing one of these buttons displays the
numeric keypad window (see page 83), and
you can then enter a new value for the
corresponding parameter with the numeric
keypad.
i Previous page button
This shows the page number of the
previously displayed menu screen. Press it
to go back to that page. When the indication
[Parent] appears, this displays the parent
directory.
k Default recall button
This only appears in those menus for which
the default recall function is available. (See
“Menus allowing a return to default
settings” (page 79).)
Press this button, turning it on, then press a
VF button or knob parameter button to
return the settings to their default values, in
the following groupings.
• Function grouping: the functions within
an HF menu under the VF button
• Knob parameters (parameters currently
controlled by the knobs)
l b (previous) button and B (next)
button
The b button returns to the previous menu.
Press the B button to continue to the next
menu.
Menu Operations
The HF button (1 to 7) indications
change to show the items within the
selected group.
2
Press the HF button for the desired
item.
The indications in the status area and
function button area change, and you
can now make various changes to the
selected item.
Selecting a function
Press the appropriate function button within
the function button area.
Shape and color of the button
Pressing the button turns it on, and it lights,
showing the state.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
j Keyframe status
This shows the keyframe status of the
reference region. Pressing this button
switches the menu screen as follows.
When a menu other than the Key Frame
menu is currently shown: The menu
screen switches to the Key Frame
menu.
When the Key Frame menu is currently
shown: The menu screen switches to
the menu that was on the screen
immediately before the Key Frame
menu.
In some parts of menus such as the File
menu, this functions as a “Region selection
area,” for selecting the region to which
operations apply.
Lit pale blue: The function is enabled, and
the parameters can currently be
adjusted with the knobs.
Lit orange: The function is enabled.
Lit purple: Execution button. Pressing the
button immediately executes the
function. (Example: [Auto Start]
button in the Chroma Adjust menu)
Pressing a button of this type displays a
further menu, allowing more detailed
settings. (Example: [Chroma Adjust]
button in the Type menu)
Selecting an item
1
Press the VF button (1 to 7) for the
desired group of items.
Basic Menu Operations
77
Setting parameters
This marking on a function button indicates
that there are parameters which can be
adjusted with the knobs.
Pressing this function button assigns
parameters to the knobs.
You can set the parameter values by either
of the following methods.
• Turn the knob (1 to 5) corresponding to
the parameter, to adjust the value.
• Press the knob parameter buttons (1 to 5)
corresponding to the parameter. This
displays the numeric keypad window
allowing you to enter the desired value.
In the description of specific setting
procedures, the knob adjustment is
described, as follows.
Example: When wipe pattern key is selected
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Density
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
When the [MENU] button in the device
control block is lit, you can use the trackball
and Z-ring to control the parameters.
• Move the trackball on the x-axis to
control the parameter for knob 1 or on the
y-axis to control the parameter for knob
2. Moving up or to the right increases the
parameter value, and moving down or to
the left decreases the parameter value.
• Use the Z-ring to adjust the parameter for
knob 3. Turning clockwise increases the
parameter value, and turning
counterclockwise decreases the
parameter value.
Going back to the previous menu
To return to the last displayed menu, press
the previous page button.
Returning to default state in function
groupings
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,
turning it on.
This enters the menu default recall
mode.
78
Basic Menu Operations
2
Press the VF button you want to return
to the default state.
This returns the settings within the
function grouping to the default state,
and the [Default Recall] button goes
off.
Note
The default state of the settings depends on
the setting of the initial status mode, set in
the Setup menu of system setup, as follows.
User: The state when [Initial Status Define]
is executed.
Factory: Factory default settings
Returning knob parameters to
default state
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,
turning it on.
This enters the menu default recall
mode.
2
For details, see the table, “Knob
parameters to which default recall does
not apply” on page 81.
Press the knob parameter button you
want to return to the default state.
This returns the knob parameter value
to the default state, and the [Default
Recall] button goes off.
Notes
• In the following table, “Menus allowing a
return to default settings,” the default
recall function does not apply to some
knob parameters.
• The default recall function does not
return the horizontal (H) and vertical (V)
position settings to their default state
individually. Returning the horizontal
(H) position to its default state also
returns the vertical (V) position to its
default state automatically, and vice
versa.
For details, see the table, “Knob
parameters subject to restriction on
default recall” on page 82.
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number
Menu name
M/E1
VF1
1110-series
Key1 a)
VF2
1120-series
Key2 a)
VF3
1130-series
Key3 a)
VF4
1140-series
Key4 a)
VF5
1150-series
Wipe a)
VF6
1160-series
DME Wipe a)
VF7
1170-series
Misc a)
VF1
1210-series
Key1 a)
VF2
1220-series
Key2 a)
VF3
1230-series
Key3 a)
VF4
1240-series
Key4 a)
VF5
1250-series
Wipe a)
VF6
1260-series
DME Wipe a)
VF7
1270-series
Misc a)
M/E2
Basic Menu Operations
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Menus allowing a return to default settings
79
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number
Menu name
M/E3
VF1
1310-series
Key1 a)
VF2
1320-series
Key2 a)
VF3
1330-series
Key3 a)
VF4
1340-series
Key4 a)
VF5
1350-series
Wipe a)
VF6
1360-series
DME Wipe a)
VF7
1370-series
Misc a)
VF1
1410-series
DSK1 a)
VF2
1420-series
DSK2 a)
VF3
1430-series
DSK3 a)
VF4
1440-series
DSK4 a)
VF5
1450-series
Wipe a)
VF6
1460-series
DME Wipe a)
VF7
1470-series
Misc a)
VF1
2210
Color Bkgd 1 a)
VF2
2220
Color Bkgd 2 a)
VF1
2410-series
CCR1 a)
VF2
2420-series
CCR2 a)
VF1
2510-series
Still b)
VF2
2520-series
Clip b)
VF3
2530-series
Reposition/Lock b)
VF4
2540-series
File b)
VF5
2550-series
Folder b)
VF1
2311
Aux Bus b)
P/P
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
COLOR BKGD
CCR
FRAME MEM
AUX/MON
80
Basic Menu Operations
Top menu selection button
name
VF number
(HF number)
Menu number
Menu name
DME
VF1
4110-series
Edge b)
VF2
4120-series
Video Modify b)
VF3
4131
Freeze b)
VF4
4141
Non-Linear b)
VF5
4150-series
Light/Trail b)
VF6
4160-series
Input/Output b)
VF7
4170-series
Enhanced Video
Modify b)
VF1
4210-series
Ch1–Ch2
VF2
4220-series
Ch5–Ch8 b)
(HF3)
6113
Path b)
GLB EFF
KEY FRAME
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
a) Menu to return to the default settings for particular functions or for particular knob parameters
(see page 81.)
b) Menu to return to the default settings for particular knob parameters (see page 81.)
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply
Menu number a)
Menu name
Button name
Knob
Parameter
1111
Type
[Luminance] and [Linear] in
<Key Type> group
4
Filter
[Color Vector] in <Key Type>
group
1
2
(Parameter
group [2/2])
Y Filter,
C Filter
5
Filter
[Color Cancel] in <Color
Cancel> group
5
Filter
[Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>
group
5
Pattern
[Multi]
3
Invert Type
1111.1
1112.1
1113
Type >CRK Adjust [Key Active]
Edge >Matte
Main Mask b)
[Pattern]
5
Pattern
[Multi]
3
Invert Type
Basic Menu Operations
81
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply
Menu number a)
Menu name
Button name
Knob
Parameter
1116
Transition
[Wipe] in <ON Transition Type>
group
1
Transition
Rate
Pattern
[Wipe] in <OFF Transition
Type> group
1
5
1116.1
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Transition >
Wipe Adjust
5
Transition
Rate
Pattern
[Key Blink] and [Edge Blink] in
<Blink> group b)
1
Blink Rate
[Mix] in <Transition Type> group
1
Transition
Type
[Wipe] in <Transition Type>
group
1
5
Transition
Rate
Pattern
[Multi]
3
Invert Type
[H] and [V] in <Pairing> group
1
Width
[H], [V], and [Fringe] in
<Modulation> group
4
Shape
[Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>
group
3
Pattern
1154.1
Edge/Direction >
Matte Adjust
[Multi]
3
Invert Type
1164
Edge/Direction
[Independent Trans Rate] in
<Pattern Limit Release> group
1
Transition
Rate
1171
Transition
[Mix], [Nam], [Super Mix],
[Preset Color Mix], [Wipe], [DME
Wipe], and [FTB] in <Transition
Type> group
1
Transition
Rate
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies for M/E-2,
M/E-3, and P/P. Also, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.
b) Does not appear for Key3 and Key4.
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall
Menu number Menu name
82
Button name
1111.1
a)
Type >CRK Adjust [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group
1112.1
a)
Edge >Matte
Adjust
[Position]
1113 a)
Main Mask
[Position]
1116.1 a)
Transition >Wipe
Adjust
[Position]
1116.3 a)
Transition >DME
Wipe Adjust
[Position]
Basic Menu Operations
Knob
Parameter
1
2
Position H
Position V
1
2
H
V
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall
Menu number Menu name
Button name
Knob
Parameter
1
2
Position H
Position V
1
2
Position H
Position V
5
Pattern
1154.1 a)
Edge Direction
>Matte Adjust
[Position]
1155 a)
Main Modify
[Position] in the <Position> group
Main Modify
>Multi Adjust
[Position]
2122.2
Composite
>Pattern Adjust
[Position]
2131
Reposition
[Normal]
1155.1
a)
[Black&White]
Color Bkgd1
[Position]
2412.1 b)
Primary CCR
>Mask1 Adjust c)
[Position]
4116
DME >Edge
>Wipe Crop
[Position/Size]
4127
DME >Video
Modify >Mask
[Position/Size]
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
2210
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies to M/E-2,
M/E-3, and P/P. Equally, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.
b) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for CCR1: the same applies to CCR2.
c) The sample applies to Mask2 Adjust.
Numeric keypad window
1 Item display
2 Max./min. value indication
3 Input value
4 Close button
5 TC (timecode)
button
6 – (minus)
button
7 Clear button
8 Trim button
9 Enter button
Basic Menu Operations
83
a Item display
This is the name of the parameter being set
in the numeric keypad window.
b Max./min. (maximum/minimum)
value indication
This shows the maximum and minimum
settings of the parameter.
c Input value
This is the value being input into the
numeric keypad window.
d Close button
This closes the numeric keypad window.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
e TC (timecode) button
When the numeric keypad window is
opened for a setting requiring a timecode
value to be entered, this button appears in a
depressed state.
You can enter a timecode value in the range
that depends on the signal format (see
“Setting the Signal Format (Format
Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3)) as
follows:
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:nn,
where nn = (number of frames per
second) – 1.
f – (minus) button
This toggles the sign of the entered value.
When it is pressed, the value is negative.
g Clear button
This clears the input. It does not change the
parameter setting.
h Trim button
After entering the difference from the
current value, press this button to confirm
the numeric input.
i Enter button
This confirms the entered value.
84
Basic Menu Operations
If correctly set, the numeric keypad
window closes.
If not correctly set, the input display
changes color.
Keyboard window
space, \, /, :, ;, , (comma), . (dot), <, >,
*, ?, ", |
Note
Except when changing source names, the
following characters cannot be used. The
same applies to macro file editing.
4 BS button
1 Item display
2 Input string
3 Close button
7 Space button
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
qd Line feed
button
0 Left button
6 Shift button
9 Del button
5 Caps Lock button
8 Clear button
qa Right button
qs Enter button
a Item display
This is the name of the parameter being set
in the keyboard window.
d BS button
This clears the character immediately
before the cursor in the input string.
b Input string
This is the character string being input in
the keyboard window.
e Caps Lock button
This enables input of capital letters only.
c Close button
This closes the keyboard window.
Note
You can enter items to be displayed on the
control panel LCD using lowercase letters,
but these will be converted to capitals for
display.
Basic Menu Operations
85
MS-DOS does not distinguish case in
filenames, and therefore you are
recommended to enter filenames in capital
letters.
f Shift button
This selects the characters on the shift side
of the keys. The shift is released when you
enter a character.
g Space button
This enters a space character.
h Clear button
This clears all of the characters in the input
string.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
i Del button
This clears the character immediately after
the cursor in the input string.
j Left button
This moves the cursor one character to the
left in the input string.
k Right button
This moves the cursor one character to the
right in the input string.
l Enter button
This sets the input string as a parameter
value, and closes the keyboard window if
the value has been entered correctly. If the
value has not been entered correctly, the
display color changes.
m Line feed button
After pressing the Shift button, press this
button to feed a line. The input string shows
“|”.
Function of the top menu window
1 Top menu selection buttons
7 Shut down button
8 Add Favorite button
6 Close button
2 Input display
3 Numeric entry section
4 Clear button
5 Enter button
86
Basic Menu Operations
a Top menu selection buttons
These are the same as the top menu
selection buttons in the menu control block.
Pressing one of these buttons closes the top
menu window and displays the selected
menu in the menu display.
b Input display
This shows the page number entered with
the numeric entry section.
Shutting down the menus
1
For details of the top menu window, see
“Function of the top menu window”
(page 86).
2
c Numeric entry section
Enter a page number.
d Clear button
Press this to clear the input display.
A confirmation message appears.
3
To restart menu operations
Power on the control panel once more.
h Add Favorite button
Pressing this button allows the currently
displayed menu to be registered to the
Shortcut menu.
Registering a menu to the
Shortcut menu
1
g Shut down button
Shuts down the menus.
2
Note
Press [Yes].
This shuts down the menu system after
a while, and the menu display changes
to black. Now power off the system.
f Close button
Press this to close the top menu window.
Be sure to shut down the menus before
powering off the control panel.
Press [Shut down].
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
e Enter button
Pressing this button without entering a page
number closes the top menu window with
the current menu remaining in the menu
display.
If you enter a page number then press this
button, this confirms the value in the input
display. If it is a correct page number, the
top menu window closes, and the menu
display shows the new menu. If it is not
correctly set, the input display changes
color.
In the menu screen, press the menu
page number button to open the top
menu window.
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut
menu, select the desired group.
Display the menu you want to register,
and then press the [Add Favorite]
button.
The currently displayed menu is
automatically registered to a blank
button.
Use of the color palette window
When a parameter is assigned to the knobs
as a combination of luminance, saturation,
and hue, pressing a knob parameter button
displays a color palette window.
Basic Menu Operations
87
1Color palette
buttons
2Operation
buttons
3Color display
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
4Numeric
keypad
a Color palette buttons
Press one of these to enter the
corresponding color in the display.
By default the following settings are
available.
First row: white, yellow, cyan, green
Second row: magenta, red, blue, black
Third row: all black
b Operation buttons
Set: If you press any color palette button
with this button held down, the color
shown in the color display is assigned
to the color palette button.
Copy: If you press a color palette button
with this button held down, the color is
used as the source for copying. Next
press a different color palette button to
copy to that button.
Swap: If you press two color palette
buttons in sequence with this button
held down, the two colors are swapped.
88
Basic Menu Operations
Default: If you press any color palette
button with this button held down, the
color palette button is set to the default
color.
c Color display
This shows the setting color, and the
parameters (LUM, SAT, and HUE).
By adjusting the parameters with the knobs,
you can create any color.
If a parameter value is outside the permitted
range for RGB (0 to 255), the indication
“Illegal Color” appears, and this is adjusted
to a value in range.
Cancel: Pressing this button returns to the
state when the color palette window
was opened.
d Numeric keypad
Use this to enter numeric values for
parameters.
For details of use, see page 83.
Switching Between the
Main Menu Site and
Subsidiary Menu Site
For menu transitions, you can store two
separate versions in the main and subsidiary
menu sites.
By switching sites, and pressing the b
button and the B button you can trace the
history in each menu.
To switch the subsidiary menu
site on and off
For details of the assignment operation, see
“Assigning Functions to the Menu Control
Block Top Menu and User Preference
buttons” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
In the [Group Select] box, select the
group.
The group buttons appear.
3
Press the button for the desired menu.
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Assign [SUB MENU SITE] to a menu
control block top menu selection button or
user preference button. To switch to the
subsidiary menu site, press this button,
turning it on.
2
Creating a shortcut menu
Assign frequently used menus to buttons, to
create a “Favorites” menu.
To create a menu group
1
In the Home menu, select VF2
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’
The following menu appears.
Shortcut Menu
Recalling a menu using the
shortcut menu
1
In the Home menu, select VF2
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’
The following menu appears.
2
Press [Group Edit].
The following menu appears.
Basic Menu Operations
89
3
Press [Yes].
This deletes the settings.
To register a menu on a button
You can register 15 buttons in one group.
1
3
4
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut
menu, press [Button Edit].
With the cursor, select the group name
(in this case a blank button) for the
operation.
Press [Rename].
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
A keyboard window appears.
5
Enter a group name (maximum 24
characters), and press Enter.
Menu No.
This confirms the group name.
Button name
To copy a menu group
1
2
3
4
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit
menu, press the button for the copy
source group.
Press [Copy].
Press the button for the copy
destination group.
Press [Paste].
This copies the menu group settings.
To delete menu group settings
1
2
3
4
5
Press [Clear].
6
Basic Menu Operations
Move the cursor to the position where
you want to display the button. To
change the content of an already
displayed button, press the button to
select it.
Press [Page Set].
A page number input window appears.
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit
menu, select the group to be deleted.
A confirmation message appears.
90
2
Enter the page number for the menu
you want to register.
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
Enter the button name (maximum 24
characters).
7
To change the button color, press
[Color Set].
Button color samples appear.
8
Press the desired color.
This completes the assignment of the
menu to the button.
9
Repeat steps 2 to 8 to complete the
“Favorites” menu.
To copy button settings
1
4
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
2
3
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit
menu, press the copy source button to
select it.
Press [Copy].
Press the copy destination button to
select it.
Press [Paste].
This copies the button settings.
To delete button settings
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit
menu, press [Clear].
This deletes the button settings.
Note
The shortcut menu settings are handled as
part of the control panel setup. You can
recall and save them in the same way as
setup data.
Basic Menu Operations
91
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel
Basic Menu Operations
92
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and
Transitions
Video Processing Flow ...............................................................................94
Signal Selection ...........................................................................................96
Basics of Signal Selection ...................................................................96
Bus Selection .......................................................................................97
Signal Assignment and Selection ........................................................98
Signal Name Display .........................................................................102
Transitions .................................................................................................103
Selecting the Next Transition ............................................................103
Transition Types ................................................................................103
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation .............................................106
Key Priority Setting ..................................................................................109
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block ..................109
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation ..................................111
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ..........................113
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ............................114
Super Mix Settings ...................................................................................115
Color Matte Settings .................................................................................116
Executing a Transition .............................................................................119
Transition Indicator Function ............................................................119
Setting the Transition Rate ................................................................120
Pattern Limit ......................................................................................122
Executing an Auto Transition ............................................................126
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition) ..127
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ................................127
Non-Sync State ..................................................................................127
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode .......................................128
Transition Preview ...................................................................................131
Independent Key Transitions ..................................................................133
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations ..................................136
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 136
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate ....................................137
Video Processing Flow
The switch from the current video stream (appearing on the corresponding
program monitor) to a new video stream is referred to as a transition.
The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a
transition on an M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
94
Video Processing Flow
Select current background video
(page 96)
Select next transition (page 103)
Background
Keys 1 to 4
Select new background video (page 96)
Make key settings (page 139)
Select transition type (page 103)
Cut
Mix
NAM
Super
mix
Preset color
mix
Wipe
DME wipe
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Make wipe settings
(page 201)
Make DME wipe settings
(page 232)
Preview the effect of transition (page 131)
Execute the transition (page 119)
Video Processing Flow
95
Signal Selection
You carry out signal selection with the cross-point buttons in the cross-point
control block of the M/E bank or PGM/PST bank, and the buttons in the
auxiliary bus control block.
Source name displays
Key row
XPT HOLD button
Key delegation buttons
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
DME1
DME2
DME3
DME4
SHIFT button
UTIL1
UTIL2
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Background B row
Background A row
Cross-point buttons
Cross-point control block
Basics of Signal Selection
Each of the M/E bank and auxiliary bus control block has cross-point buttons
which are identified by numbers common to the bank and block, and a signal
is assigned to each number.
These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block,
and a signal is assigned to each number.
96
Signal Selection
The basis of signal selection is to select, in a cross-point button row, the crosspoint button to which is assigned the desired signal.
Bus Selection
The key row is shared by multiple buses.
To assign a bus to the cross-point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block,
press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus.
Note
When using the CCP-6224/6324, buses may be assigned with the cross-point
button rows for keys 1 and 2 as the auxiliary bus control block.
The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and crosspoint button rows, and the delegation operations.
Bank
Bus name
Cross-point
button row
Delegation operation
M/E-1
Background A bus
Background A
row
−
Background B bus
Background B
row
−
Key 1 bus
Key row
Key 3 bus
Turn on the [KEY3] button
Turn on the [KEY4] button
Program bus
Program row
−
Preset bus
Preset row
−
DSK 1 bus
DSK row
Turn on the [DSK1] button
DSK 2 bus
Turn on the [DSK2] button
DSK 3 bus
Turn on the [DSK3] button
DSK 4 bus
M/E-1 PGM/ Utility bus
PST
DME 1 video bus
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Turn on the [KEY2] button
Key 4 bus
PGM/PST
Turn on the [KEY1] button
Key 2 bus
Turn on the [DSK4] button
Key row
Turn on the [UTIL] button
Turn on the [DME1] button
a)
DME 2 video bus
Turn on the [DME2] button
a)
Signal Selection
97
Bank
Bus name
Cross-point
button row
Delegation operation
Auxiliary
bus control
block
AUX1 to AUX48
buses
The key row of
the bank selected
with the bank
selection buttons
in the auxiliary
bus control block
Turn on the appropriate
buttons in accordance with
the signal assignment made
in the Setup menu.
MONITOR 1 to
MONITOR 8 buses
Frame memory
source 1 and frame
memory source 2
buses
DME 1 and DME 2
video buses
DME 1 and DME 2
key buses
Edit preview bus
M/E-1 UTILITY bus
P/P UTILITY 1 and P/
P UTILITY 2 buses
M/E-1 Key 1 fill to M/
E-1 Key 4 fill buses
M/E-1 Key 1 source to
M/E-1 Key 4 source
buses
DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill
buses
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
DSK 1 source to DSK
4 source buses
M/E-1 external DME
bus
P/P external DME bus
a) To turn on the [DME1] to [DME4] buttons requires one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] and [DSK1]
to [DKS4] buttons to be on.
Signal Assignment and Selection
Assigning signals to buttons
Each cross-point button has a button number, to which you assign a signal.
In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 49 connectors
on the rear panel of the switcher, you can also select signals generated within
the switcher.
Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal, forming a pair.
You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu.
98
Signal Selection
For details of Setup menu operations, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Cross-point button control block button numbers
On the M/E and PGM/PST banks, each cross-point button has two button
numbers, and you use the [SHIFT] button to switch between these numbers.
The button numbers are as follows.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Signal Selection
99
Button numbers when all 12 buttons are used as cross-point buttons.
SHIFT button
When the SHIFT button is off:
When the SHIFT button is on:
XPT
HOLD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
DME1
DME2
DME3
DME4
UTIL1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
UTIL2
SHIFT
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Button numbers when the rightmost buttons (12th buttons) are used as SHIFT buttons.
SHIFT button
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
DME1
DME2
DME3
DME4
UTIL1
UTIL2
XPT
HOLD
SHIFT
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
SHIFT buttons
When the SHIFT button is off:
When the SHIFT button is on:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Note
You can use the rightmost button (number 12) as a [SIDE FLAG] button. In
this case, the shift button moves one to the left, to number 11, and the button
numbers are offset by one.
For details of the [SIDE FLAG] button, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).
100
Signal Selection
Inhibiting cross-point button operations
For each cross-point button, you can temporarily inhibit operations.
Note
This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel.
Assigning a button to the function of disabling cross-point button
operation
You can assign the button to be used for the operation to a user preference
button, in setup. The [Inhibit All Clear] function is also assigned to this button.
(See “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume
3))
Buses for which operations can be inhibited
This setting applies to the auxiliary bus control block and the cross-point
buttons in each switcher bank.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
For example, if you make the setting for one cross-point button in a switcher
bank, this inhibits operation of all cross-point buttons with the same number in
the following buses.
The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display.
• Background A, background B
• Keys 1 to 4
• Utility
• External DME
To inhibit operation of a cross-point button
Hold down the button which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the cross-point
button whose operation you want to inhibit.
The button you pressed flashes amber, and this makes the operation inhibited.
Note
Even when you inhibit operation of a cross-point button, macro attachment
settings are still possible (see “Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment” in
Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).
To clear a cross-point button operation inhibit setting
Hold down the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the button
whose operation is inhibited (flashing amber).
This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed.
To clear all operation inhibit settings
Press the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned and the button to which
“Inhibit All Clear” is assigned simultaneously.
Signal Selection
101
Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer
When you select a signal in a switcher bank background A row or AUX bus
control block which is set to be linked with the audio mixer, the program output
of the audio mixer follows the signal selection.
For details of the setting, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign menu)” in
Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Notes
• For details of audio mixers that can be connected, contact your Sony service
or sales representative.
• When the signal is switched with a snapshot, keyframe, and so on, the audio
mixer is not linked.
• When bus fixed mode is selected in setup (see page 128), the audio mixer
program output is linked to the bus output as the background.
Signal Name Display
You can attach a name (source name) to each signal assigned to a cross-point
button, with a maximum of 16 characters.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
• The source name displays in the cross-point control block and auxiliary bus
control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to
numbers 1 to 12 (or 11).
• To display the source names for shifted numbers (13 to 24 or 12 to 22), press
the [SHIFT] button to the right of the key row delegation buttons.
• To display the source names of the key signals assigned to button numbers,
hold down one of the key delegation buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] or [DSK1]
to [DSK4] buttons or, for the auxiliary bus control block, hold down the
[KEY] button.
Colors of lit cross-point buttons
In a particular row of cross-point buttons, only the last pressed button is
effective, and lights amber or red. The amber indicates the “low tally” state,
and the red indicates the “high tally” state, to indicate whether or not the
selected signal appears in the final output video.
Significance of colors of lit cross-point buttons
102
Color
State
Significance
Amber
Low tally
Does not appear in final output video
Red
High tally
Appears in final output video
Signal Selection
Transitions
Selecting the Next Transition
To execute a transition, it is first necessary to decide how the image will be
changed as a result of the transition. This selection is carried out using the next
transition selection buttons (see page 38) in the transition control block of each
M/E or PGM/PST bank.
For details of operations, see “Procedure for Basic Transition Operation”
(page 106).
Transition Types
Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs.
Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the
transition control block of each M/E or PGM/PST bank.
For details of this operation, see “Procedure for Basic Transition Operation”
(page 106).
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
The following are the transition types.
Mix
This is a dissolve, in which the new video progressively fades in over the
current video, with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant. At
the mid-point of the transition (when the fader lever is in the center position),
the output of each is 50%.
This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition. In
this case, the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly, with the
progress of the transition.
NAM (non-additive mix)
In this dissolve, the current video and new video signals are compared, and the
signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The
current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as
the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is
progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half with the new video
maintained at 100% output.
Transitions
103
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
Super mix
In this dissolve, the current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half
of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to
100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the
second half with the new video maintained at 100% output.
For details on super mix settings, see page 115.
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
Preset color mix
This is a two-stage dissolve, comprising two transitions, the first a dissolve to
a color matte, and the second from the color matte to the new video.
In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix
(dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new
video also in a mix (dissolve).
For details on color matte settings, see page 116.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
Wipe
A wipe replaces the current video by the new video according to a
predetermined pattern. This transition type can also be selected for an
independent key transition.
For details, see “Wipes” (page 23) and Chapter 5 “Wipes” (page 199).
DME wipe
Using a DME effect, it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from
the current image, as in a wipe. You can also use this transition type as an
independent key transition.
For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 23) and Chapter 6 “DME Wipes” (page
221).
104
Transitions
Clip transitions
Linked to a mix (dissolve) or wipe transition, a frame memory clip (movie) is
played back.
Cut
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Transitions
105
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation
The positions of the principal buttons used for basic transition operation are as
follows.
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKGD
Next transition
selection buttons
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
KEY
PRIOR
MIX
NAM
SUPER
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
WIPE
DME
PRIOR
SET
Transition type
selection buttons
KEY1
NORM
NORM
/REV
REV
AUTO
TRANS
TRANS
PVW
CUT
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
Transition execution
section
Transition control block
1
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
2
In the cross-point control block, select the background video with the
background A row of cross-point buttons.
Select the way in which the transition will affect the image, using the next
transition selection buttons in the transition control block.
For an overview, see “Selecting the Next Transition” (page 103).
To change the background: Press the [BKGD] button, turning it on.
To insert or delete a key: Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons (or
[DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank), turning it on.
To enable the key priority setting, which determines the key overlay
order after the transition: Press the [KEY PRIOR] button, turning it
on.
You can press more than one button at the same time.
To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus
simultaneously: Press the [ALL] button.
To allocate a particular next transition button to the [ALL] button
function, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).
106
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation
3
For the transition to change the key priority, set the priority for after the
transition.
For details of the key priority setting operation, see “Key Priority Setting”
(page 109).
4
Select the new video used for the transition.
• In the background B row of cross-point buttons, select the new
background video.
• When inserting a key, select the key signal, and make any required
settings.
For details of key settings, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 139).
To carry out a cut transition, skip to step 7; otherwise continue to step 5.
5
Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control
block.
To carry out a dissolve to the new video: Press one of the [MIX],
[NAM], [SUPER MIX], and [PST COLOR MIX] buttons, turning it
on.
To carry out a wipe: Press the [WIPE] or [DME] button, turning it on.
To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip:
Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used
(FM1&2CLIP, FM3&4CLIP, FM5&6CLIP, and FM7&8CLIP).
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
You can also use the Misc >Transition menu to select a desired transition
type for the M/E or PGM/PST bank. (See “Selecting the Transition Type
by a Menu Operation” (page 114).)
For an overview of the transition types, see “Transition Types” (page
103).
Note
The transition type selection buttons in the transition control block can be
interchanged in the setup menu.
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in
Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
6
Make the required settings, according to the selected transition type.
For details of the settings, see the relevant section.
Super mix: “Super Mix Settings” (page 115)
Preset color mix: “Color Matte Settings” (page 116)
Wipe: “Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings” (page 201)
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation
107
DME Wipe: “Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings” (page 232)
Clip transition: “Clip Transition Operations” (page 296)
Using the transition preview function (page 131), you can check the
transition on the preview monitor.
7
Carry out the transition in the transition execution section.
For a gradual transition such as a mix (dissolve) or wipe: Press the
[AUTO TRANS] button, or operate the fader lever.
To execute a transition by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button, first
set the transition rate (specified as the duration of the transition).
(See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 120).)
When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type,
you can also set the transition range. (See “Pattern Limit” (page 122).)
For an instantaneous transition: Press the [CUT] button.
For details, see “Executing a Transition” (page 119).
Transition linked to the audio mixer
If the video signal selected in the background B row is linked to the audio mixer
in setup, then the audio mixer sound changes with the transition. That is,
pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button gives a cross fade, and pressing the
[CUT] button gives an instantaneous sound switch.
For details of setup, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter
19 (Volume 3).
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Notes
• The audio mixer is not linked to a snapshot or key frame transition.
• The audio mixer is not linked to a transition using the fader lever.
• If the bus-fixed mode (see page 128) is selected in the setup menu, and the
fader lever is in the lowest position, there is a cross fade from the audio
selected on the B row to the audio selected on the A row.
• The audio mixer is not linked to a key transition.
• In the following cases, the audio and video may be out of sync.
– When carrying out a cross fade in some DME wipes (for example, “picture
in picture”)
– When executing a preset color mix in two-stroke mode
• For details of audio mixers that can be used, Sony service or sales
representative.
108
Procedure for Basic Transition Operation
Key Priority Setting
Selecting the key priority
If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video, you can check or
change the key priority, that is to say, the order in which the keys are overlaid.
When a key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) is selected as the next transition, you can
also change the key priority in the new video.
The key priority values go from 1 to 4, with a higher priority key being “in
front” as seen on the screen.
4
3
2
1
Priority sequence on the screen
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
There are two ways of setting the priority: either using the [PRIOR SET] button
in the transition control block, or using the Misc menu to access the Key
Priority menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Note
When the operating mode is set to multi program, the key priority setting
cannot be made.
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block
The positions of the buttons used for the operation are as follows.
Key Priority Setting
109
Next transition
selection buttons
KEY PRIOR button
PRIOR SET button
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
KEY
PRIOR
MIX
NAM
SUPER
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
WIPE
DME
PRIOR
SET
NORM
NORM
/REV
REV
AUTO
TRANS
TRANS
PVW
CUT
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
Transition control block
Changing the currently inserted key priority
1
If the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, press another
next transition selection button to turn the [KEY PRIOR] button off.
(When the [KEY PRIOR] button is on, the transition control block
switches to the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition.)
2
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Holding down the [PRIOR SET] button, press the one of the next transition
selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the
PGM/PST bank) for the key to appear on top.
The selected key now appears on top, on the program monitor.
The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change.
Key 1 selected.
Key priority: 3, 1, 4, 2
Key priority: 1, 3, 4, 2
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat this operation as
required.
110
Key Priority Setting
Changing the key priority for after the transition
When executing a transition, turning on the next transition selection button
[KEY PRIOR] causes the keys to be rearranged based on the set priority.
To set the key priority for after the transition, use the following procedure.
1
In the transition control block, hold down the [PRIOR SET] button and
press the [KEY PRIOR] button to turn it on. Do not release the [PRIOR
SET] button before advancing to step 2.
The [KEY PRIOR] button lights green, and it becomes possible to change
the key priority setting for after the transition.
2
Hold down the [PRIOR SET] button, and press the one of the next
transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4]
buttons in the PGM/PST bank) for the key you want to bring to the front
after the transition.
To set the priority to be the same as before the transition, press the [BKGD]
button.
Note
The [BKGD] button is only effective when in the mode for changing the
key priority for after the transition.
3
4
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
When the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, the selected
key appears on top on the preview monitor. The priority of keys other than
the selected one does not change.
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat the previous operation
as required.
Execute the transition.
The keys are rearranged based on the set priority.
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation
Changing the priority of the currently inserted keys
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF3 ‘Key
Priority.’
The Key Priority menu appears.
Key Priority Setting
111
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.
The keys are inserted in the key priority sequence with priority 1 at the
front.
Priority 1
Priority 2
1
2
3
Priority 3
4
Priority 4
Note
It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers.
The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Changing the key priority for after the transition
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF4 ‘Next
Key Priority.’
The Next Key Priority menu appears.
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.
For details of the key priority sequence, see the figure shown for step 2 in
the previous item (see page 112).
The keys appear in the set order on the preview monitor.
3
Execute the transition.
The keys are rearranged in the set order on the program monitor.
112
Key Priority Setting
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority
You can check whether keys are currently output, and the key priority setting,
using the key status display in the transition control block of the M/E or PGM/
PST bank.
The display is above the next transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4]
([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank).
Display of the key output status
When a key is included in the output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank, the
corresponding ON indicator lights.
Key priority display
Lit
Lit
Flashing
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
The key priority is indicated by numerals 1 to 4 lighting.
The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1, and the keys
underneath are numbered 2, 3, 4 away from the viewer (see page 112).
To display the key priority for after the transition, press the [KEY PRIOR]
button in the transition control block, turning it on. For keys for which the
priority after the transition is different from the current priority, the
corresponding numerals 1 to 4 flash. For a key with the same priority, the
indication remains on.
Example key status display given when the [KEY PRIOR] button is pressed:
Current key priority: 1, 2, 3, 4
Key priority after the transition: 3, 2, 1, 4
Indicators: 1, 3 (flashing), 2, 1 (flashing), 3, 4
Lit
Flashing
Lit
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
Example key status display (showing the key priority after the transition)
Key Priority Setting
113
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu
Operation
You can also select the required transition type by a menu operation.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to
the selected transition type.
For details, see the following.
• “Super Mix Settings” (page 115)
• “Color Matte Settings” (page 116)
• “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 120)
Note
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for
Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3)), there
may be cases in which two or more transition types have been selected.
114
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation
Super Mix Settings
You can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at the midpoint of the transition, in the range 0 to 100%.
Note
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
3
Select [Super Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.
Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
2
A Gain
Background A output level
0.00 to 100.00%
3
B Gain
Background B output level
0.00 to 100.00%
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Super Mix Settings
115
Color Matte Settings
You can specify the color matte by luminance, saturation, and hue values.
Also, in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility bus.
Notes
• This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.
• In the multi-program mode, you can use a preset color mix only when
selecting the background for the next transition.
One-stroke mode and one-time mode
• You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single
transition. This is called “one-stroke mode.”
When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting, a preset color
mix is always carried out in the one-stroke mode.
• You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed,
the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically.
This is called “one-time mode.”
When only the background is changed
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Current video
Color matte
New video
Preset color mix (changing background only)
116
Color Matte Settings
When a key is inserted
Key fades out
Key
When a key is
selected as the next
transition
When no key is selected
Key fades in
Preset color mix (transition including key)
By means of a Setup menu setting, it is possible to preserve the key state while
carrying out the color matte mix.
When, with a key inserted, a key is selected in the next transition
Key state preserved
Key gradually
removed
Key
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Preset color mix (when set to preserve key state)
Setting the color matte
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1
‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
3
Select [Preset Color Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.
In the <Preset Color Mix Fill> group, select one of the following.
Flat Color: monochrome color matte
Utility Bus: signal selected on the utility bus
4
When “Flat Color” is selected, turn the knobs to adjust the color matte.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
2
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
Color Matte Settings
117
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
118
Color Matte Settings
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
4
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
Executing a Transition
There are two modes of executing a transition: an auto transition by button
operation or a manual transition using the fader lever.
It is also possible to combine both methods, taking control with the fader lever
of an auto transition which has partly completed, or complete a transition
started with the fader lever as an auto transition.
By combining common transitions with independent key transitions, different
transition types can be applied to the background and keys, for example
allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve.
When the audio mixer is linked in setup, you can carry out an auto transition,
and also switch the sound with the audio mixer. (See “Transition linked to the
audio mixer” (page 108).)
Transition Indicator Function
In each of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, to the left of the fader lever is a
transition indicator composed of multiple LEDs. This indicator shows the state
of the transition, whether auto or manual, by which LEDs are lit.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Lit
Transition indicator
Executing a Transition
119
For example, in the previous illustration, it can be seen that the transition is
more than half completed.
When the transition is completed, all of the LEDs go off.
Setting the Transition Rate
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the numeric keypad
control block to enter a numeric value, or using the Misc menu to access the
Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
You can also display the transition rate and independent key transition rate for
each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and change the settings. (See
“Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings” (page
321).)
Note
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to set
the transition rate.
Frame input mode and timecode input mode
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
For numeric input of the transition rate value, there are two modes: frame input
mode and timecode input mode. The frame input mode is selected
automatically when the frame display mode is selected. The timecode input
mode is selected automatically when the timecode display mode is selected.
Frame input mode: The entered value is a number of frames.
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames
Timecode input mode: The entered value is a timecode value.
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 1 second 23 frames.
Note
Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode, a value not
smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode.
Frame display mode and timecode display mode
For the transition rate display in the transition control block, there are two
modes: frame display mode and timecode display mode. You can select one of
these modes in setup. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter
19 (Volume 3).)
Note
The setting is common to all banks of the switcher.
120
Executing a Transition
Frame display mode: Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames. In this
display mode, a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for
display as a number of frames.
Timecode display mode: Values are shown as timecode values, consisting of
seconds and frames. In this display mode, a value entered in frame input
mode is converted for display as a timecode value. If the value consists of
four or more digits, the last digit is not shown.
Example: A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as “9.23” and a value
of 10 seconds 1 frame appears as “10.0.”
Setting the transition rate in the numeric keypad control block
Display
EFF
ENTER button
SNAP
SHOT
+/-
8
7
9
EFF
DISS
SHOT
BOX
MCRO
MASTR
UNDO
ALL
4
TRANS
RATE
M/E
1
P/P
USER
1
USER
2
STORE
STATS
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
STORE
P-BUS
GP1
5
CLR
AUTO
6
TRANS
TRIM
2
1
3
GPI
ENBL
0
AUX
1
ENTER
RCALL
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
M/E
1
P/P
AUX
2
AUX
3
AUX
4
AUX
5
AUX
6
AUX
7
FMS
1
FMS
2
EDIT
PVW
KEY
SHIFT
Region selection buttons
TRANS RATE button
Numeric keypad
Numeric keypad control block
1
2
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [TRANS RATE] button.
Press the region selection button for the M/E or PGM/PST bank for which
you want to set the transition rate, turning it on.
The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region
name and the current transition rate setting for the region.
3
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.
Executing a Transition
121
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To clear the entry, press the [CLR] button.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.
The transition control block display of the same bank (M/E or PGM/PST)
also shows the setting.
To enter a difference from the current value
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]
button.
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.
Setting the transition rate by a menu operation
1
In the switcher bank, select first VF7 ‘Misc’, then HF1 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
3
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Transition Rate
Transition Rate
0 to 999 (frame count)
Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the
settings
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can display the transition rate
and independent key transition rate, and change the settings.
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings” (page 321).
Pattern Limit
When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition, you can
specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the
transition, for each bank independently.
When the pattern limit function is enabled, carrying out a transition results in
the following effect for example settings.
122
Executing a Transition
• When the limit value is set to 50%, the effect at the end of the transition is
the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case
(with the pattern limit function disabled); the wipe pattern does not complete.
• When the limit value is set to 0%, the wipe effect is completely disabled, and
carrying out the transition produces no change in the image.
• When the limit value is set to the maximum 100%, the image changes in
exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off, but when the
transition is completed, the cross-point selections on the background A and
B buses do not interchange.
There are two ways of setting a pattern limit: either by operating the fader lever
to save the fader position, or by using the Wipe menu or DME Wipe menu to
access the Edge/Direction menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
Notes
• A pattern limit only applies when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the
transition type.
• A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition (see page
133).
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKBD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
MIX
NAM
SUPER
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
WIPE
DME
PRIOR
SET
NORM
NORM
/REV
REV
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
KEY
PRIOR
TRANS
PVW
TRANS PVW button
AUTO
TRANS
CUT
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
PTN LIMIT button
LIMIT SET button
Transition control block
Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever
1
Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern
size.
• First make sure that the [PTN LIMIT] button is off.
• To check the pattern size on the preview monitor, first press the [TRANS
PVW] button, to select the transition preview mode (see page 131).
Executing a Transition
123
2
Press the [LIMIT SET] button.
This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit.
Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation
1
When a wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/PST
menu, select first VF5 ‘Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/
PST menu, select first VF6 ‘DME Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
3
Press the [Pattern Limit] button, turning it on.
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Pattern Limit
Pattern limit
0.00 a) to 100.00% b)
a) 0.00%: Executing the transition does not change the video output at all.
b) 100.00%: The transition is the same as when no pattern limit is set, but the cross-point
button selections of the background A and B buses do not interchange when the transition
completes.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Executing a pattern limit transition
1
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it on.
The button you pressed lights amber.
2
Carry out the transition.
The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit. Even if the
transition completes, the cross-point button assignments of the background
A and B buses do not interchange.
3
Carry out the transition once again.
The status before the previous transition is restored.
To cancel the pattern limit
To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure,
press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it off.
If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure, the pattern limit has been
reached, carry out the following procedure.
124
Executing a Transition
1
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button.
The button you pressed lights green.
2
Carry out the transition.
The [PTN LIMIT] button goes off, and the pattern limit state is released.
Depending on the way in which the transition was executed, the action will
be as follows.
• When you press the [CUT] button, the pattern limit is immediately
released, and the image switches instantaneously.
• When you press the [AUTO TRANS] button, until the state of the next
transition, the transition is carried out over the duration given by the
transition rate.
• When you move the fader lever, the transition is carried out from the
pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was
carried out.
Moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position
with the transition state, and you can move the fader lever either in the
forward direction or in the reverse direction.
Depending on the Setup settings, the transition may be executed at the
instant you press the [PTN LIMIT] button, and the button goes off. In this
case, execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition
rate in the menu setting, as far as the state of the next transition.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame
Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in Chapter 20
(Volume 3).
To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released
1
In the <Pattern Limit Release> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select
one of the following.
Auto Trans Rate: Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control
block
Independ Trans Rate: Independent transition rate
2
If you selected “Independ Trans Rate” in step 1, adjust the following
parameter.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Transition Rate
Independent transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
Executing a Transition
125
Executing an Auto Transition
The following two modes can be used for auto transition.
Cut
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.
Auto transition
The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out
automatically at a constant rate, using the transition effect selected as the
transition type.
You can set the transition rate in advance. (See “Setting the Transition Rate”
(page 120).)
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKBD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
KEY
PRIOR
MIX
NAM
SUPER
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
WIPE
DME
Fader lever
PRIOR
SET
NORM
NORM
/REV
REV
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
AUTO
TRANS
TRANS
PVW
CUT
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
AUTO TRANS button
CUT button
Transition control block
To execute a transition on the M/E or PGM/PST bank by a button operation,
use the following procedure in the transition control block.
To carry out an instantaneous cut transition: Press the [CUT] button.
To carry out a gradual transition: Press the [AUTO TRANS] button.
This executes the transition at the preset transition rate (see page 120).
While the transition is executing, the [AUTO TRANS] button lights
amber. When it completes the button goes off.
To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously: Press the
[CUT] button.
The [AUTO TRANS] button goes off.
126
Executing a Transition
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual
Transition)
Using the fader lever, you can manually control the progress of the transition.
Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the
transition.
To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever, use
the following procedure.
To carry out the transition completely: Move the lever over the full range of
its travel.
To pause a partly executed transition: Stop moving the fader lever.
To resume a paused transition: Resume moving the fader lever.
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions
Using the [AUTO TRANS] button, the [CUT] button, and the fader lever, use
the following procedures.
Moving the fader lever during an auto transition
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
During an auto transition started by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button,
operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever, and the [AUTO
TRANS] button goes off. Thereafter, the fader lever controls the progress of
the transition.
Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever
• Press the [CUT] button to instantaneously complete the transition.
• Press the [AUTO TRANS] button to complete the rest of the transition at the
preset transition rate.
If the transition rate is set to 100 frames, and the fader lever has moved
through 1/4 of the transition, then the remaining 3/4 of the transition is carried
out in 100 frames.
Non-Sync State
If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed
as an auto transition, then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition
state. This is termed a non-sync state.
Executing a Transition
127
In a non-sync state, two lit LEDs indicate the position from which a normal
transition can be carried out. This is either at one end position or both end
positions of the fader lever travel.
Moving the fader lever toward the position of the lit LEDs does not carry out a
transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non-sync state
is released, and it is now possible to carry out the next transition.
Once the fader lever is moved
to this position, the non-sync
state ends, and the next
transition (direction shown by
the arrow) is possible.
Manual transition completed as auto
transition when moving the fader
lever upward: Top two LEDs light.
Manual transition completed as
auto transition when moving the
fader lever downward: Bottom two
LEDs light.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
• If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs, this
carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader lever
travel.
• Even in a non-sync state, you can carry out an auto transition by pressing the
[AUTO TRANS] button. During the auto transition, the indicators show the
transition progress in the usual way, but when the transition completes, they
once again indicate the non-sync state.
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode
The following describes the difference between flip-flop mode and bus fixed
mode, taking an M/E bank as an example; the functionality is the same,
however, on the PGM/PST bank.
Normally, when a background transition is carried out on an M/E bank, the
signals selected on the A and B rows of cross-point buttons are interchanged at
the end of the transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the
128
Executing a Transition
background output is always from the background A bus. This is called “flipflop mode.”
The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which there is no bus
interchange. In this mode, when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the
output from the A bus is always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom
of its travel the output from the B bus is 100%.
Flip-flop mode
A
B
A
BLACK
B
BLACK
Bus fixed mode
BLACK
Fader
lever
BLACK
Buttons lit
A
BLACK
B
BLACK
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode
In the bus fixed mode there is a fixed relationship between the position of the
fader lever and the signal output on each bus. Depending on the direction of the
transition, the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular
direction, as shown in the following table. This does not affect an auto
transition, which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction.
Fader lever operating direction in bus fixed mode
Next transition
Transition direction
Background
AtB
Downward
BtA
Upward
Keys 1, 2, 3, and 4
Fader lever movement
On t Off (deletion)
Downward
Off t On (insertion)
Upward
• When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the
background and keys 1, 2, 3, and 4, then the transition for all of these must
be in the same direction complying with the above table.
Executing a Transition
129
• If as a result of an auto transition, for example, the fader lever position does
not agree with the signal output, this is a non-sync state (see page 127) and
LEDs light at both end positions of the fader lever travel. Moving the fader
lever does not carry out a transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end
position the non-sync state is released, and it is now possible to carry out the
next transition. If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit
LEDs, this carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader
lever travel.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
130
Executing a Transition
Transition Preview
With the preview output of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can check
the effect of a transition in advance. To carry out a transition preview, press the
[TRANS PVW] button in the transition control block.
Note
In multi-program mode or bus fixed mode (page 128), it is not possible to carry
out a transition preview.
Carrying out a transition preview
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST bank transition control block, press the [TRANS
PVW] button.
The [TRANS PVW] button lights green, and the switcher is now in the
transition preview mode. At this point, the preview output is the same as
the program output before the [TRANS PVW] button was pressed.
2
Operate the fader lever, or press the [AUTO TRANS] button or [CUT]
button.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
On the preview monitor, you can check the effect of the transition.
To terminate a transition preview
There are three modes for a transition preview. To terminate a transition
preview, carry out the operation which depends on the mode, and press the
[TRANS PVW] button, turning it off.
Lock: Toggling the [TRANS PVW] button on and off switches between the
transition preview mode and the normal mode.
Hold: The preview mode obtains only while the [TRANS PVW] button is held
down.
One Time: Each time a transition ends, it reverts to the normal mode.
Set the transition preview mode in the following combinations.
For details, see Chapter 19 “Control Panel Setup (Panel)” (Volume 3).
Transition Preview
mode
Switcher setup
(Transition menu)
<Transition Preview> group
Panel setup
(Operation >Custom Button
menu)
<Trans Pvw> group
Lock
Normal
Lock
Hold
Normal
Hold
Transition Preview
131
Transition Preview
mode
Switcher setup
(Transition menu)
<Transition Preview> group
Panel setup
(Operation >Custom Button
menu)
<Trans Pvw> group
One Time
One Time
–
Notes
• During a transition, whether executed with the [AUTO TRANS] button or
the fader lever, it is not possible to press the [TRANS PVW] button.
• In bus fixed mode (see page 128), transition previews are not available.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
132
Transition Preview
Independent Key Transitions
What is an independent key transition?
In addition to common transitions, it is possible to carry out independent
transitions on the keyers of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank. These are
called “independent key transitions.”
By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common
transition, different transition types can be used for the background and keys.
It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key
deletion by means of a Setup menu setting.
For details of this operation, see “Basic Independent Key Transition
Operations” (page 136).
Combining other transitions with independent key transitions
When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the
same key, you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix (dissolve)
(see page 103) to the key simultaneously.
When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key
as auto transitions (see page 126), the result depends on the timing of pressing
the respective [AUTO TRANS] buttons.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Simultaneous execution
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed
simultaneously, the following is the result.
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent
key transition is a mix (dissolve).
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key inserted, it is
deleted simultaneously with the two transitions.
Independent Key Transitions
133
When the common transition completes, even if the independent key
transition is still not completed, the two end simultaneously.
Wipe and mix
(dissolve) are
carried out
simultaneously.
The key is deleted,
even if the
independent key
transition has not
completed.
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key not inserted, it
is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions. If the common
transition or independent key transition ends first, the other continues to
completion.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Wipe and mix
(dissolve) are
carried out
simultaneously.
The transitions
continue until both
are completed.
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions
Time offset execution
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time
offset, the following is the result.
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent
key transition is a mix (dissolve).
Time offset execution with the key inserted: With the key inserted, it is
deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset.
Whichever button is pressed first, when the common transition completes,
even if the independent key transition is still not completed, the two end
simultaneously.
134
Independent Key Transitions
Example: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS] button
is pressed later
Common transition
(wipe) start
The key is deleted,
even if the
independent key
transition has not
completed.
Independent key
transition (mix) start
Time offset execution with the key inserted
Time offset execution with the key not inserted: With the key not inserted,
it is inserted with the transition whose [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed
first.
Since the key is then in the inserted state, with the transition whose [AUTO
TRANS] button is pressed later, the key is deleted. When the key is
completely deleted, both transitions complete.
Example 1: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS]
button is pressed later
Independent key
transition (mix)
start
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Common transition
(wipe) start
The transition
completes with the
key deleted.
Example 2: When the common transition [AUTO TRANS] button is
pressed later
Independent
key transition
(mix) start
Common
transition (wipe)
start
The transition
completes with the
key deleted.
Time offset execution with the key not inserted
Independent Key Transitions
135
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations
Independent key/downstream key transition execution section
ON
ON
ON
ON
1234123412341234
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
KEY
PRIOR
MIX
ALL
PST
COLOR
MIX
KEY3
DSK1
TRANS
KEY4
SUPER
MIX
NAM
DSK2
TRANS
PRIOR
SET
NORM
WIPE
NORM
/REV
DME
REV
AUTO
TRANS
DSK3
TRANS
TRANS
PVW
CUT
DSK4
TRANS
PTN
LIMIT
LIMIT
SET
KF
Transition control block
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
You can set independent transitions for the keyers on the M/E or PGM/PST
bank.
To execute an independent key transition, press the appropriate button in the
independent key/downstream key transition execution section of the transition
control block.
The color with which buttons are lit shows the status, as follows.
Lit green: During a transition
Lit amber: Key inserted
Lit red: Key inserted into final output video
Not lit: Key not inserted
To select the transition type and set the transition rate, use a menu operation.
Note
In an independent key transition, the pattern limit function is not available.
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu
Operation
You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu
operation.
136
Independent Key Transitions
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu for the selected appears.
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the numeric keypad
control block to enter a numeric value, or using the Key menu to access the
Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.
You can also display the transition rate and independent key transition rate for
each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and change the settings. “Displaying a
List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings” (page 321).
When the setup selection is for separate transition rates for inserting or deleting
a key, you can set both rates independently. For example, with the system in
the state with the key not inserted, the transition rate setting applies to key
insertion.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Setting the independent key transition rate in the numeric
keypad control block
1
In the numeric keypad control block, hold down the [TRANS RATE]
button, and in the independent key transition control block, press the
delegation button [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/PST
bank) for the key for which you want to set the transition rate.
The numeric keypad control block changes to the mode for inputting the
independent key transition rate, and its display now shows the
corresponding region name and the current transition rate set for the
region.
2
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.
• Enter a value of up to three digits.
• To clear the entry value, press the [CLR] button.
For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode, see page 120.
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
Independent Key Transitions
137
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.
To enter a difference from the current value
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]
button.
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.
Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu for the selected key appears.
2
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.
3
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.
Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Transition Rate
Transition rate
0 to 999 (frame count)
Displaying the independent key transition rates in a menu and
changing the settings
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can also display the transition
rate and independent key transition rate, and change the settings.
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings” (page 321).
138
Independent Key Transitions
Chapter 4 Keys
Overview ....................................................................................................141
Key Types ..........................................................................................141
Key Modifiers ....................................................................................143
Key Memory ......................................................................................146
Key Default .......................................................................................147
Key Setting Operations Using Menus .....................................................148
Key Setting Menus ............................................................................148
Key Type Setting ...............................................................................149
Chroma Key Composition .................................................................151
Chroma Key Adjustments .................................................................152
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source ...................................................158
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................160
Masks .................................................................................................167
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................169
Key Modify Clear ..............................................................................171
Blink Function ...................................................................................171
Video Processing ...............................................................................172
Key Setting Operations With the Cross-Point Control Block ..............173
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................173
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block ...........................175
Operations in the Key Control Block ................................................175
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................179
Masks .................................................................................................183
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................184
Other Key Setting Operations ...........................................................185
Resizer .......................................................................................................186
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys .....................................186
Resizer Interpolation Settings ...........................................................191
Resizer Crop/Border Settings ............................................................191
Applying Resizer Effects ...................................................................194
Key Snapshots ...........................................................................................196
Key Snapshot Operations ..................................................................196
Overview
A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an
image or superimposed text. The signal determining how the background is cut
out is termed “key source,” and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is
termed “key fill.”
The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a
keyer.
Note
There are some restrictions on the functions that can be used with key 3 and
key 4, compared to key 1 and key 2.
Key Types
The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut
out the background. In each bank, you can use the following key types. You
can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control
block, or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer. (See “Key Type Setting”
(page 149).)
Luminance key
The background is cut out according to the luminance (Y) of the key source
signal, and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the
background signal.
Linear key
Chapter 4 Keys
This is a type of luminance key, but there is a reduced variability in gain,
allowing more precise adjustment.
Color vector key
The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and
chrominance components of the key source signal. When perfect keying is not
possible with a luminance key, this allows a key signal to be created even if the
luminance level is low, provided that the colors have high saturation.
Overview
141
Clean mode
In a luminance key, linear key or color vector key, you can enable the clean
mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not affect the key fill,
which is added unchanged to the background. This improves the keyed image
quality, but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted
must be completely black, or it will color the background. You set the clean
mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer. (See “Setting the key type in
a menu” (page 149).)
Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes off, and cannot be
turned on.
• When the key type is a pattern key
• When key inversion is on
• When the key fill is a matte
• When the key edge is an outline
• When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on
• When fine key is on
• When the key positioner is on
Chroma key
A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background, and
the key fill is then inserted. The inserted signal is also referred to as the
foreground, and the composite image is called a chroma key image.
Foreground
Background
Chapter 4 Keys
Chroma key image
For details of chroma key composition, see “Chroma Key Composition” (page
151). For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items, see
“Chroma Key Adjustments” (page 152).
142
Overview
Key wipe pattern key
This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key
source.
Note on wipe pattern modifiers
In a key wipe pattern key, you can apply various modifications, depending on
the pattern used, and the modifiers in common with a wipe.
However, modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not
reflected.
Key Modifiers
Edge modifiers
Note
For key 3 and key 4, it is not possible to use edge modifiers.
You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key. (See “Key Edge
Modifications” (pages 160 and 179).)
Effect
Normal
This is the state with no key edge modifiers
applied.
Border
This applies a uniform width border to the
edge of the key. You can adjust the border
width and density. You can also enable the
separate edge function, and adjust the top,
bottom, left, and right border widths
separately.
Image
Chapter 4 Keys
Name
Overview
143
Chapter 4 Keys
Name
Effect
Drop
border
This applies a border below and to the right
for example, of the key. You can adjust the
border width, position, and density.
Image
Shadow
This applies a shadow below and to the right
for example, of the key. You can adjust the
shadow width, position, and density.
Outline
This uses the outline of the original key as
the key. You can adjust the width and
density of the outline. You can also enable
the separate edge function, and adjust the
top, bottom, left, and right outline widths
separately.
Emboss
This applies an embossing effect to the
outline of the key. You can adjust the width
and position of the embossing, and the
density. You can adjust the density
separately for key fill and key edge. When
embossing is on, the Fine Key and zabton
functions go off.
–
Soft
edge
This softens the edge of the key.
–
Zabton
This inserts a translucent pattern behind a
key. You can adjust the pattern size,
softness, density and color.
–
Edge type and key fill/key source position
Note
For key 3 and key 4, it is not possible to set key drop to On.
144
Overview
The key edge modification function has two modes: a mode (“key drop ON
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position moves downward, and a mode
(“key drop OFF mode”) in which it does not move downward.
Key drop ON mode: The key fill/key source position moves downward by
eight scan lines or four scan lines. When a drop border or shadow is
selected, it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key.
Key drop OFF mode: The key fill/key source position does not move. When
a drop border or shadow is selected, it is not possible to apply a border to
the top edge of the key.
In the key drop ON mode, a menu setting selects between the mode (“4H
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered by four scan lines,
and the mode (“8H mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered
by eight scan lines.
When Fine Key is on, the edge width is forced to the range 0.00 to 4.00.
Note that in the following situations, the key drop mode is forcibly turned on.
• When the edge type is border, outline, or emboss
• When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on
• When Fine Key is on
To fix key fill / key source in key drop off mode
In the Edge menu, switch frame delay mode on (see page 164).
Regardless of the fine key and edge type settings, key fill and key source are
fixed in key drop off mode. In this mode key image has a one-frame delay.
Notes
• This function uses the resizer, and therefore the normal effect of the setting
is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer.
• This function cannot be used for key 3 or key 4.
Edge fill
Chapter 4 Keys
When a border, drop border, or shadow modifier is selected, you can select a
signal to fill these edge effects.
The edge fill is the signal from the dedicated color matte generator.
In the case of an outline, there is no edge fill signal selection, because the key
fill signal fills the outline, and the rest of the image remains as the background.
For the emboss effect, in place of the edge fill signal, the emboss fill matte 1
and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used.
Masks
A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image. This
allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be
protected, or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape.
Overview
145
For details of masking operations, see “Masks” (pages 167 and 183).
Key mask and background mask
There are two types of mask: a key mask and a background mask.
Key mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the
background appearing.
Background mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result
in the key fill appearing.
Masked area (box)
Key mask
Background mask
Main mask: This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided
on each keyer, or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the
mask source.
When the box generator is selected, a rectangular mask is formed.
When the pattern generator is selected, you can select the pattern and apply
modifiers.
Key Memory
Chapter 4 Keys
The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross-point button
to be automatically stored, so that the next time the same cross-point button is
selected these settings are recalled automatically.
There are two modes for key memory: simple mode and full mode.
The parameters stored in each mode are as follows.
Simple mode: key type, clean mode (including the plane setting for chroma
keying), key position, key inversion, and adjustment values for the
particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter, etc. This includes color
vector key, key wipe pattern key, and chroma key. However, in the case of
a chroma key, it excludes color cancel, Y balance, foreground CCR,
window, and shadow.)
Full mode: All settings except transition (the same parameters as simple mode,
Fine Key, key modifiers, mask settings, chroma key detailed settings, and
so on)
146
Overview
For the settings for these modes, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame
Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in Chapter 20
(Volume 3).
Key Default
With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their
defaults.
The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as
follows.
• Adjustment values for the particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter,
etc.)
In the case of chroma keying, all adjustment values return to their default
values.
• Key position
• Key inversion
• Clean mode
For details, see “Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults” (page
185).
For the menu operation to return the key adjustment values to their defaults,
see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 78).
Chapter 4 Keys
Overview
147
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
There are two ways of making key settings: either using menus, or using the
key control block.
This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the
menus, taking the M/E-1 >Key1 menu as an example.
Operations in the Key menus are the same for all banks (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and
PGM/PST).
For details of the method of using the key control block, see “Key Setting
Operations With the Key Control Block” (page 175).
Key Setting Menus
The key setting menus for each bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST) are as
follows.
Bank
Keys set
Menus
M/E-1
Keys 1 to 4
M/E-1 >Key1 to 4
PGM/PST
Downstream keys 1 to 4
PGM/PST >DSK1 to 4
Accessing a key setting menu
Chapter 4 Keys
For example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, carry out any of the following
procedures.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], then
press VF1 ‘Key1.’
• In the M/E-1 bank transition control block, press the KEY1 next transition
selection button twice in rapid succession.
• Press the [KEY1] button in the key delegation row of the M/E-1 bank twice
in rapid succession.
• In the key control block, press the M/E delegation button [M/E1], then press
the key delegation button [KEY1] twice in rapid succession.
Any of the above operations displays the M/E1 >Key1 menu.
Note that you can access the DSK menus by pressing the button for the
corresponding key in the downstream key control block twice in rapid
succession.
148
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Key Type Setting
Setting the key type in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
The Type menu appears.
2
In the <Key Type> group, select the key type.
Luminance: luminance key
Linear: linear key
Chroma: chroma key
Color Vector: color vector key
Key Wipe Pattern: key wipe pattern key
For the selected key type, you can now set the parameters.
For an overview of the key types, see “Key Types” (page 141).
3
Carry out the following settings as required, depending on the key type
selected in step 2.
To enable clean mode (see page 142) for a luminance key, linear key or
color vector key: Select [Clean Mode] so that it is set on.
When clean mode is enabled, key fill is added to the background
without cutting out with key source.
When chroma key is selected: Select [Chroma Adjust] to access the
Chroma Adjust menu (see page 154), and make the required settings.
When a key wipe pattern key is selected: In the M/E-1 >Key1 >
Transition >Wipe Adjust menu (see page 213), carry out pattern
selection and modifier setting, then return to the M/E-1 >Key1 >Type
menu.
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
For a wipe pattern selected for a key wipe pattern key, the [Edge] and
[Direction] modifier settings are not available.
4
Set the parameters.
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Reference level for generating the
key signal
+109.59 to –7.31
2
Gain
Key sensitivity
–100.00 to +100.00
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
149
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Density
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
4
Filter
Filter coefficient
1 to 9 a)
a) Setting this value to 1, produces the “through” state in which no filter is applied. The larger
the value, the more strongly the filter applies.
• When a chroma key is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Density
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
• When a color vector key is selected
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Y Clip
Reference level for creating
luminance signal
+109.59 to –7.31
2
Y Gain
Luminance signal sensitivity
–100.00 to +100.00
3
C Clip
Reference level for creating
chrominance signal
100.00 to 0.00
4
C Gain
Chrominance signal sensitivity
–100.00 to +100.00
5
Density
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Y Filter
Luminance signal filter coefficient
1 to 9
2
C Filter
Chrominance signal filter
coefficient
1 to 9
• When a key wipe pattern key is selected
Chapter 4 Keys
5
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Degree of edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Density
Key density
0.00 to 100.00
Make the following settings as required.
To invert the black and white sense of the key source: Press [Key
Invert], turning it on.
To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key: Press [Key Position], turning it on,
and set the parameters.
150
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Phase
Key horizontal position
–4.00 to +4.00
2
Left
Key left edge position
–4.00 to +4.00
3
Right
Key right edge position
–4.00 to +4.00
To set the key priority: Press [Key Priority] or select VF7 ‘Misc’ and
HF3 ‘Key Priority’ to access the Key Priority menu.
For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation” (page
111).
Chroma Key Composition
Normal mix and additive mix
In creating a chroma key image, either a normal mix or an additive mix can be
used. To select which, use the Type >Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer.
Normal mix: The foreground is cut out with the key signal, and then combined
with the background, which has also been cut out with the key signal.
Additive mix: The background, which has been cut out with the key signal, is
combined with the unshaped foreground. This is effective for a naturallooking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent
objects.
Plane function
In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key signal, and
variations in the (blue) background appear in the composite image. To prevent
this, it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background, and
any parts below this level are cut forcibly.
Composing an image by chroma keying
1
2
Chapter 4 Keys
There are two types of composition for chroma keying: normal mix, and
additive mix.
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
Select [Chroma] in the <Key Type> group.
It becomes possible to adjust the key density (see page 150).
3
Select [Chroma Adjust].
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
151
4
Carry out auto chroma key adjustments.
Also carry out manual adjustments if necessary to obtain an optimum
chroma key image.
For the adjustment procedures, see page 152.
5
In the <Mix Mode> group, select [Normal Mix] or [Additive Mix]
depending on the desired type of chroma key composition.
When using an additive mix for chroma keying, the (typically blue)
background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black. For this,
use the color cancel function (see page 155).
Using the plane function
In an additive mix, since no key is applied to the foreground, any variations in
the (typically blue) background may appear in the composite image. To avoid
this, a particular luminance level can be set for the (blue) background, and
regions of lower luminance forcibly cut.
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Plane] on.
Adjust the following parameter.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance level
0.00 to 100.00
Chroma Key Adjustments
Chapter 4 Keys
Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include
automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function, and manual
adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately. The optimum
results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma
key function, then making any fine adjustments as required.
The following manual adjustments are possible.
Key active
When this function is off, only the foreground is output and you can make
adjustments of color cancel (see the next paragraph).
Color cancel
If the foreground image includes shades of the background color, turn this
function on to remove the color from the foreground image.
152
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Chroma key window
You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching
the specified hue. When this adjustment is off the default ranges are used.
Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color (reference
color) in the foreground (typically a plain blue background), and the “window”
refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified
reference color to create the key signal.
As seen on a vectorscope (that is, in the hue-saturation color space), the range
for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector. This range is specified by
two parameters: the “Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue
parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines the degree of
truncation (see the following figure).
Angle a)
Reference color
specified by Hue
setting
Crop a)
Range of colors remaining
as foreground
Range of colors creating the key signal
(to be replaced by background signal)
a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if
you use the auto chroma key function.
Window adjustment
Chapter 4 Keys
Y balance
In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the chrominance
component only, and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are
replaced by the background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify a
luminance level range within which the key is active, and replace the specified
part by the background.
You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the
composition and the key signal for the color cancel function. When applied to
the key signal for the composition, this produces the foreground with the color
cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to provide an impression of
smoke, for example.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
153
When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key, the relevant
part is output in its original color without canceling, and therefore it is possible
to combine colors which are the same color as the background (i.e. typically
blue) in the foreground.
Video signal adjustment
You can vary the foreground signal gain, or change the hue. There are separate
adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal, and Y and C components.
Making auto chroma key adjustments
Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to
specify a part of the foreground video (for example, the blue background color)
and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image.
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type,’ then select [Chroma] in the
<Key Type> group.
Select [Chroma Adjust].
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.
3
Select [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group.
The foreground video only appears on the monitor, with a white boxshaped sample selector.
4
Adjust the position and size of the sample selector, to specify the color to
be used as the basis of chroma keying (typically a blue background).
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
3
Size
Size
1.00 to 100.00
a) The setting ranges depend on the signal format, screen aspect ratio, and size settings.
5
Select [Auto Start] in the <Auto> group.
This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the
sample selector, and displays the composite image on the monitor.
Making key active adjustments
When the key active function is on, the composite image is output to the
monitor, and you can watch the monitor while manually adjusting the keying.
154
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
When the key active function is off, only the foreground image appears. Set
this off when manually adjusting color cancel (see the next section).
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Key Active] on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Chroma key reference level
0.00 to 100.00
2
Gain
Key gain
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
4
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
5
Filter
Filter coefficient
1 to 9
Making color cancel adjustments
If the background color is leaking into the foreground video, turning the color
cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage.
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, turn [Key Active] off.
Only the foreground image appears on the monitor.
2
3
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
5
Filter
Filter coefficient
1 to 9
Chapter 4 Keys
4
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Color Cancel] on.
Set [Key Active] on.
The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor.
Making key signal adjustments for color cancel
When the color cancel function is set on, you can adjust the key signal for color
cancel.
1
In the <Color Cancel> group of the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Color
Cancel] on.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
155
2
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Cancel Key] on.
The cancel key is now on, and you can now adjust the key signal for color
cancel.
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Color cancel key reference level
0.00 to 100.00
2
Gain
Color cancel key gain
–100.00 to +100.00
Make the following settings, as required, in the <Color Cancel> group.
• When setting [Key Position] on and adjusting the color cancel key
edge position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Phase
Move left and right edges of the
color cancel key simultaneously
Left edge position
value shown
2
Left
Move left edge of the color cancel
key
–3.00 to +3.00
3
Right
Move right edge of the color
cancel key
–3.00 to +3.00
• When setting [Window] on and adjusting the detection range of the
color cancel key
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Crop
Crop value
100.00 to 0.00
2
Angle
Angle value
180.00 to 0.00
For details of the crop and angle parameters, see “Chroma key window”
(page 153).
• When setting [Y Balance] on and adjusting the ratio in which Y
balance is added to the color cancel key
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Mixture
Ratio of Y balance key
0.00 to 100.00
Adjusting the window
Setting the window function on allows you to adjust the detection range used
to determine the key signal. When this function is off, the default range is used
for the key.
For an overview of the window, see “Chroma key window” (page 153).
156
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
After making sure that the values of Clip, Gain, and Hue are adjusted
appropriately, use the following procedure to make the window adjustment.
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Window] on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Crop
Crop value
100.00 to 0.00
2
Angle
Angle value
180.00 to 0.00
Adjusting the Y balance
Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that, even if the hue is the same,
only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background.
For an overview of the Y balance, see “Y balance” (page 153).
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Y Balance] on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Luminance range
0.00 to 100.00
2
Gain
Key gain
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
Adjusting the video signal
You can change the gain of the foreground signal, or vary the Hue. There are
separate adjustments for the gain of the whole video signal, or Y and C
individually.
Chapter 4 Keys
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [FRGD CCR] on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Overall gain of video signal
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Y Gain
Y signal gain
–100.00 to +100.00
3
C Gain
C signal gain
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Hue
Hue offset amount
–180.00 to +180.00
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
157
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source
Selecting key fill and key source
To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’
The Type menu appears.
2
In the <Key Fill> group, select either of the following for use as key fill.
Key Bus: signal selected on the key 1 fill bus
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator
3
4
If you selected [Key Bus] in step 2, press the key delegation button
[KEY1] in the cross-point control block and select the key fill signal in the
key row.
If you selected [Matte] in step 2, in the same Type menu, press the [Matte
Adjust] button to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the singlecolor or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a singlecolor matte or a two-color combination in the <Fill Matte> group.
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
Mix Color: Carry out a color mix. Adjust color 1 and color 2, and select a
mix pattern (see the next section).
Chapter 4 Keys
5
In the <Key Source> group, specify the key source selection mode.
Self: The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source.
When the key type is selected as chroma key, select [Self].
Auto Select: The signal allocated, being paired with the key fill bus signal,
to a cross-point button is automatically selected as the key source. The
setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in the Setup menu.
(See “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).)
Split: You can select a key source signal independently of the key source
automatically selected in Auto Select mode.
158
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
6
When [Split] was selected in step 5, hold down the [KEY1] button and
press the appropriate button in the key row to select the key source signal.
To select the video signal assigned to the button, turn off the [KEY] button
in the AUX bus control block, and to select the key signal, turn on the
[KEY] button before pressing the button in the key row.
Notes
• Carrying out a [KEY] button operation in the AUX bus control block
requires the [KEY] button operating mode (Key Source Bus Select
Mode) to be set. With the factory default setting (Key), the [KEY] button
is always off, and it is only possible to select a key signal assigned to a
button as the key source signal.
For details, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).
• When [Split] is selected, the key memory function (see page 146) is
disabled.
To select a video signal assigned to a cross-point button
By selecting the key source bus with an auxiliary bus control block AUX
delegation button, and pressing the cross-point button, it is possible to select
the video signal assigned to the cross-point button.
(If you press the cross-point button with holding down [KEY], the key signal
assigned to the cross-point button.)
Note
In the above operation, the following settings must have been made.
• Assigning the key source bus to an AUX delegation button
For details, see “Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)”
in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Chapter 4 Keys
• Setting the [KEY] button operating mode
For details, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 19
(Volume 3).
Carrying out a color mix for key fill
When [Matte] is selected for key fill, you can combine color 1 and color 2. For
the combination, you can use not only a key wipe generator pattern for key
edge color mix.
1
In the <Key Fill> group of the Type menu, select [Matte] and press [Matte
Adjust].
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
159
The Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
3
Select [Mix Color] in the <Fill Matte> group.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Softness of the edge of the
pattern
0.00 to 100.00
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the menu
for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select menu), and make
adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern
adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).
4
In the Type menu, adjust color 1 and color 2.
To adjust color 1, select [Color1], and to adjust color 2, select [Color2],
then adjust the following parameters.
Knob
5
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Key Edge Modifications
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
For key 3 and key 4, it is not possible to use edge modifiers.
To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF2 ‘Edge.’
The Edge menu appears.
160
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
2
Select the edge type in the <Edge> group.
For an overview of the key edge modifications, see “Edge modifiers”
(page 143).
Normal: unadorned edge
Border: edge with border applied
Drop Border: edge with drop border applied
Shadow: edge with shadow applied
Outline: edge used as outline
Emboss: embossing effect applied to edge
If you select [Normal], skip to step 7.
3
Set the border width and other parameters.
When border or outline is selected: The setting parameters depend on
the key type and whether the separate edge function is enabled or not.
To enable the separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it
on.
• Separate edge off
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
(0.00 to 100.00) b)
3
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Top edge width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
2
Left
Left edge width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
3
Right
Right edge width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
4
Bottom
Bottom edge width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
5
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 4 Keys
• Separate edge on
The left, right, top, and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted
independently. The separate edge function is only valid when a
luminance key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
161
When drop border or shadow is selected: The setting parameter values
depend on the on/off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode/
8H mode (see page 144).
• “Key drop OFF” mode
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0.00 to 8.00
2
Position
Position
359.99 to 180.00
3
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
• “Key drop ON” mode
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0.00 to 8.00 a)
2
Position
Position
359.99 to 0.00
3
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0.00
to 4.00.
When emboss is selected:
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0.00 to 4.00
2
Position
Position
359.99 to 0.00
Density
0.00 to 100.00
3
Density
a)
a) The Density adjustment only affects the key edge. This can be adjusted separately from
Key Density, and if Key Density is set to 0.00, the embossed edge effect only can be
applied.
To make edge fill adjustments, carry out the settings in step 6.
Chapter 4 Keys
4
Press [Edge Matte], and adjust the color parameters for the edge fill signal.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
When the edge type is outline, in place of the edge fill signal, the selected
key fill signal fills the outline, and elsewhere remains as the background.
Press [Matte Adjust] to display the Matte Adjust menu, and carry out the
color matte adjustment for a single color or two-color combination. Select
162
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
whether to use a single color or two-color combination for the color matte
in the <Edge Matte> group.
For color mix operations, see “Carrying out a color mix for the key edge
fill matte” (page 164).
5
When emboss is selected for the edge type, adjust the color in the <Emboss
Fill> group.
To adjust matte 1 press [Matte1], and to adjust matte 2 press [Matte2], then
adjust the following parameters.
Knob
6
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
To make the edge soft, press [Soft Edge] to set it on, and adjust the
softness.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
For a normal edge, when [Soft Edge] is enabled, [Key Drop] is kept on.
7
To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left, right, top,
and bottom of the source edge, press [Fine Key], to set it on, and adjust the
following parameters.
Parameter group [1/2]
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Key top edge position
–2.00 to +2.00
2
Left
Key left edge position
–2.00 to +2.00
3
Right
Key right edge position
–2.00 to +2.00
4
Bottom
Key bottom edge position
–2.00 to +2.00
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Phase
Key horizontal position
Left edge position
value shown
2
V Phase
Key vertical position
Top edge position
value shown
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
163
Note
In the emboss function it is not possible to set [Fine Key] on.
• When the edge type is normal, drop border or shadow, enabling the [Fine
Key] function keeps [Key Drop] on.
• When applying a border to the key edge, enabling the [Fine Key]
function halves the border width setting range.
To fix key fill and key source in key drop off mode
1
In the Edge menu, press [Key Delay Mode].
The Key Delay Mode menu appears.
2
Press [Frame Delay], setting it to On.
Note
This function uses the resizer, and therefore the expected result of the
setting may not be obtained if conditions do not allow the resizer to be
used.
Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte
When you select ‘Matte’ for the edge fill of a border, drop border, or shadow,
you can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern
generated by the dedicated pattern generator.
1
In the Edge menu, select [Matte Adjust].
The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
3
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Softness of pattern edge
0.00 to 100.00
3
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The patterns are the same as wipes. (For details, see “Wipe Pattern List” in (page 362).)
To select the pattern, display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing
[Mix Pattern] in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu. After selecting one of the
164
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the Mix Pattern
Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.
4
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Softness of pattern edge
0.00 to 100.00
Adjust color 1 and color 2.
To adjust color 1 press [Color 1], and to adjust color 2 press [Color 2],
turning it on respectively, and adjust the following parameters.
5
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
If required, set the pattern modifiers.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
a) See page 211.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
165
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and inclining the
pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant speed
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 209.
6
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press [Color Invert], turning it on.
Applying the zabton effects
Notes
• For key 3 and key 4, the zabton effect is not available.
• For key 1 or key 2, it is not possible to have zabton and [Fine Key] on
simultaneously.
1
2
In the Edge menu, press [Zabton], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Pattern edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 4 Keys
Note
If in the pattern selection described below you select “Mask Pattern,” and
“Box” for the mask, the “Size” parameter here cannot be adjusted. Set
“Size” in the Main Mask menu.
3
To adjust the pattern and color, press [Zabton Adjust].
The Zabton Adjust menu appears.
4
166
In the <Zabton Pattern> group, select the pattern.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Key Wipe: Use a key wipe.
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the
menu for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select menu), and make
adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern
adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).
Key Edge Pattern: Use a color mixing pattern for key edge.
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the
menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection (Mix Pattern
Select menu), and make adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to
open the menu for pattern adjustment (Matte Adjust menu).
Mask Pattern: Use the main mask Box or Pattern.
You can also press [Pattern Select], and in the corresponding pattern
adjustment menu, change the pattern.
5
To adjust the color, press [Zabton Color] and adjust the following
parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
4
Density
Density
0.00 to 100.00
Masks
The mask function can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key or
background, or to remove defects.
Using the mask
Chapter 4 Keys
For example, to use the main mask for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF3 ‘Main Mask.’
The Main Mask menu appears.
2
In the <Mask Type> group, select the mask type.
Key Mask: Masks a part of a key.
Bkgd Mask: Masks a part of a background.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
167
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.
Box: signal from the dedicated box generator
Pattern: signal from the dedicated pattern generator
4
Set the mask source parameters.
• When a box is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Top position
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Left position
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Right position
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Bottom position
–100.00 to +100.00
5
Soft
Box softness
0.00 to 100.00
• When a pattern is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
5
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The pattern is the same as a wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
362).)
To select the pattern, display the Mask Ptn Select menu by pressing the
[Mask Ptn Select] button in the Main Mask menu.
After selecting one of the patterns (wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the
Mask Ptn Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.
Chapter 4 Keys
5
6
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
To invert the black and white sense of the mask source, press the [Mask
Invert] button, turning it on.
When a pattern is selected as the mask source, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
168
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
a) See page 211.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the
angle of the pattern rotation
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Pattern angle
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the
rate of pattern rotation
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rate of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
a) See page 209.
Applying a DME Effect to a Key
Note
A maximum of two DMEs (including DME wipes) can be used simultaneously
on a single M/E bank.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
169
Assigning a DME to a key
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF5 ‘Processed Key.’
The Processed Key menu appears.
2
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1, DME2) to
be used.
The lit colors of [DME1] and [DME2] indicate the DME assignment.
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently
selected key.
Off: DME is not assigned.
To select a DME being used by another keyer
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 324).
Selecting the video signal for the DME assigned to a key
For the operating procedure, see“Selecting the video signal for a DME
assigned to a key” (page 174).
Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal
Notes
• You can select the DME output signal on the AUX bus or edit preview bus.
• Carrying out independent key transitions with DME assigned keys applies
the transition effect for the DME output.
Chapter 4 Keys
1
In the Processed Key menu, press [Monitor].
The Monitor menu appears.
2
3
Press [Monitor Set], turning it on.
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1, DME2) to
be used.
This assigns the selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K.
The colors with which [DME1] and [DME2] are lit show the key
assignment status.
Lit green: DME currently being monitored
170
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Lit amber: DME that can be monitored
Off: Unassigned DME
Key Modify Clear
A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the
initial status settings.
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press the corresponding VF button (VF1 to VF4) to return the key settings to
their initial status.
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status, see
“Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 78).
Blink Function
Note
For key 3 and key 4, the following “edge blink” function is not available.
With the blink function, you can obtain the following effects.
Key blink: The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals. You
can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each cycle for which
the key is inserted.
Edge blink: The key fill and key edge fill signals are interchanged at regular
intervals. You can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each
cycle for which the original state holds.
The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key.
Chapter 4 Keys
Using the blink function
For example, to make the required settings for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use
the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF6 ‘Transition.’
The Transition menu appears.
2
3
In the <Blink> group, select [Key Blink] or [Edge Blink] to set it on.
Set the blink parameters.
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
171
• When key blink is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Blink Rate
Length of blink cycle
1 to 100
2
Duty
Proportion of cycle for which key
inserted
0.00 to 100.00
• When edge blink is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Blink Rate
Length of blink cycle
1 to 100
2
Duty
Proportion of cycle for which
original state holds
0.00 to 100.00
Video Processing
You can adjust the luminance and hue of the selected key fill signal.
For example, to apply video processing to the signal selected on the M/E-1
bank key 1 fill bus, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF7 ‘Video Process.’
The Video Process menu appears.
2
3
Press [Video Process], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
Chapter 4 Keys
1
Video Gain
Video gain
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Luminance gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Luminance black level
–7.31 to +109.59
To return adjustment values to their defaults
Press [Unity].
172
Key Setting Operations Using Menus
Key Setting Operations With the CrossPoint Control Block
You can make a key signal selection using the cross-point control block of the
M/E-1 or PGM/PST bank including the relevant key.
Applying a DME Effect to a Key
Checking the DME status
As an example, to check the DME status for M/E1 key 1, hold down the key
row delegation button [KEY1] in the M/E1 bank.
While the button is held down, the [DME1] and [DME2] buttons light, and the
colors with which they light indicate the status, as follows.
Lit green: A DME is assigned to M/E1 key 1. In the M/E1 independent key
transition and transition control blocks, the transition type for KEY1 is set
to a DME wipe.
Lit amber: A DME is assigned to an M/E1 key other than key 1.
In the independent key transition and transition control blocks, the
transition type for other than key 1 of M/E-1 is set to a DME wipe.
Not lit: No DME is assigned, or a DME wipe is not selected.
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 324).
Assigning DMEs to a key
Chapter 4 Keys
As an example, to assign DME1 and DME2 to key 1, in the cross-point control
block, hold down the key row delegation button [KEY1] and press the buttons
([DME1] and [DME2]) for the DME channels to be used.
In this case, press [DME1], followed by [DME2].
The buttons pressed ([DME1] and [DME2]) light green and the DMEs are
assigned to key 1.
Notes
• If the DME is selected on another keyer, the later selection takes precedence
and the button lights green.
By a setting in the Setup menu (see “Operation Settings (Operation menu)”
in Chapter 19 (Volume 3)), you can make the first selection take precedence.
• For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in two
places.
Key Setting Operations With the Cross-Point Control Block
173
Ending a DME assignment
To end the assignment of a DME to key 1, in the cross-point control block, hold
down the key row delegation button [KEY1] and press the DME button
([DME1] and [DME2]) that is lit green.
The button goes off, and this ends the assignment.
Selecting the video signal for a DME assigned to a key
1
In the cross-point control block, press the key row delegation button
[KEY1].
The assigned DME button lights amber.
2
3
4
Press the DME button (one of [DME1] and [DME2]) lit amber, which then
lights green.
To select the video signal for the side of the DME image that is currently
visible, make the signal selection in the key row.
To select the video signal for the side of the DME image that is currently
not visible (the back side), hold down the DME button (one of [DME1] or
[DME2]) and make the signal selection in the key row.
When two or more DME channels are assigned, select the video signal for each
DME in the same way.
Chapter 4 Keys
174
Key Setting Operations With the Cross-Point Control Block
Key Setting Operations With the Key
Control Block
This section describes the basic procedures for key settings using the key
control block.
Key delegation buttons
Displays
M/E delegation buttons
Knobs
Key type selection buttons
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
P/P
RE
SIZER
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
TRANS
LUM
LIN
CRK
CVK
PTN
AUTO
SEL
SPLIT
MATTE
FILL
KEY
DROP
SOFT
EDGE
BDR
DROP
BDR
SHDW
OUT
LINE
EMBOS
SHOW
KEY
MAIN
MASK
SUB
MASK
ZABTN
MORE
Key fill/key source selection buttons
DME
1
DME
2
DME
3
DME
4
DME
5
DME
6
DME
7
DME
8
MON
FM
FEED
PROC
KEY
AUTO
DELEG
OVER
RIDE
TRACE
Edge type selection buttons
MORE button
Key control block
Chapter 4 Keys
Operations in the Key Control Block
Parameter adjustment with the knobs
When the button for a function requiring parameter settings is pressed (that is,
on), you can set the parameters with the four knobs. If there are more than four
values to be assigned to the knobs, the [MORE] button lights amber. At this
point, press the [MORE] button, which turns green, to assign the fifth and
subsequent parameters to the knobs, so that the parameter settings can be made.
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
175
Selecting the bank and keyer
To make key settings, first select the bank (from M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/
PST) and keyer, then assign them to the key control block.
For example, to set key 1 on M/E-1 with the key control block, use the
following procedure.
1
2
Using the M/E delegation buttons in the key control block, press the [M/
E1] button, setting it on.
Using the key delegation buttons in the key control block, press the
[KEY1] button, setting it on.
This assigns the key control block to M/E-1 key 1.
Selecting the key type
To select the key type, press one of the key type selection buttons in the key
control block.
[LUM] button: luminance key
[LIN] button: linear key
[CRK] button: chroma key
[CVK] button: color vector key
[PTN] button: key wipe pattern key
When using a wipe pattern key as the key type, in the <Key Type> group
of the Type menu for the keyer, select [Wipe Pattern] and make the
settings.
For an overview of the key types, see “Key Types” (page 141).
The button you pressed lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters
with the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the
parameter name and the three-digit setting value.
• When the [LUM] or [LIN] button is lit green
Chapter 4 Keys
176
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Reference level for generating the
key signal
+109 to –7
2
Gain
Key sensitivity
–100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3
Density
Key density
0 to 100
4
Filter
Filter coefficient
1 to 9
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
• When the [CRK] button is lit green
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Chroma key reference level
0 to 100
2
Gain
Key sensitivity
–100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3
Hue
Hue
0 to 359
4
Density
Key density
0 to 100
• When [Key Active] is off, only the parameters Hue and Density are
displayed.
• When both [Key Active] and [Color Cancel] are off, only the parameter
Density is displayed.
• When the [CVK] button is lit green
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Y Clip
Reference level for Y signal
+109 to –7
2
Y Gain
Y signal sensitivity
–100 (shown as –00)
to +100
3
C Clip
Reference level for chrominance
signal
100 to 0
4
C Gain
Chrominance signal sensitivity
–100 (shown as –00)
to +100
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Y Filter
Y signal filter coefficient
1 to 9
2
C Filter
Chrominance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9
4
Density
Key density
0 to 100
• When the [PTN] button is lit green
Parameter
Adjustment
1
Size
Pattern size
0 to 100
2
Soft
Edge softness
0 to 100
3
Density
Key density
0 to 100
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Setting values
Selecting key fill
Select whether to use a color matte as key fill, or the signal on the key fill bus.
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
177
When using a color matte: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, setting it on. The
button lights green, and you can now set the parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Luminance
Color 1 luminance
0 to 100
Saturation
Color 1 saturation
0 to 100
3
Hue
Color 1 hue
359 to 0
When [Mix Color] is selected in the key fill Matte Adjust menu, you can
further adjust color 2.
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit amber
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Luminance
Color 1 luminance
0 to 100
Saturation
Color 1 saturation
0 to 100
3
Hue
Color 1 hue
359 to 0
4
Size
Pattern size
0 to 100
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit green
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Luminance
Color 2 luminance
0 to 100
Saturation
Color 2 saturation
0 to 100
3
4
Hue
Color 2 hue
359 to 0
Soft
Edge softness
0 to 100
When using the key fill bus signal: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, turning
it off.
To select the key fill signal, use the key bus buttons in the cross-point
control block.
Chapter 4 Keys
Selecting key source
• To use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill
bus, press the [AUTO SEL] button, turning it on. The pairing of the crosspoint buttons for key fill and key source is carried out in the Setup menu. (See
“Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).)
• To select key source independently of the key fill signal selected on the key
fill bus and paired with key source, hold down the key delegation button
[KEY1], then press the desired key row button in the cross-point control
block.
• To use as key source the same signal as the key fill signal selected on the key
fill bus, select the SELF mode by pressing the [AUTO SEL] button and
178
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
[SPLIT] button simultaneously so that both are off. When chroma key is
selected as the key type, select the SELF mode.
Key Edge Modifications
Note
For key 3 and key 4, it is not possible to use edge modifiers. It is also not
possible to set [Fine Key] to On.
To apply a modification to the key edge, press one of the edge type selection
buttons in the key control block.
[BDR] button: border
[DROP BDR] button: drop border
[SHDW] button: shadow
[OUTLINE] button: outline
[EMBOS] button: emboss
For an overview of the edge modifications, see “Edge modifiers” (page 143).
The pressed button lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters with
the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter
name and the three-digit setting value.
Setting the border parameters
When the [BDR] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the key
type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the separate
edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu for the
key.
• Separate edge off
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Border width
0 to 8 a)
(0 to 100) b)
4
Density
Border density
0 to 100
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
• Separate edge on
The border width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
179
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Top edge width
0 to 8 a)
2
Left
Left edge width
0 to 8 a)
3
Right
Right edge width
0 to 8 a)
4
Bottom
Bottom edge width
0 to 8 a)
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
To adjust the edge fill color
When [BDR] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber. Pressing the
[MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color
parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0 to 100
2
Saturation
Saturation
0 to 100
3
Hue
Hue
359 to 0
4
Density
Density
0 to 100
Setting the drop border or shadow parameters
When the [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] button is lit green, the parameter settings
differ between the “key drop OFF” and “key drop ON” modes (see page 144)
as shown below. Switching between these two modes is made by turning the
[KEY DROP] button on or off.
• “Key drop OFF” mode
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0 to 8 a)
2
Position
Position
359 to 180
4
Density
Density
0 to 100
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
• “Key drop ON” mode
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width
0 to 8 a)
2
Position
Position
359 to 0
4
Density
Density
0 to 100
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
180
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
To adjust the edge fill color
When [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber.
Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge
fill color parameters with the knobs.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0 to 100
2
Saturation
Saturation
0 to 100
3
Hue
Hue
359 to 0
4
Density
Density
0 to 100
Setting the outline parameters
When the [OUTLINE] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the
key type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the
separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu
for the key.
• Separate edge off
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Outline width
0 to 8 a)
(0 to 100) b)
4
Density
Outline density
0 to 100
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type
• Separate edge on
The outline width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Top edge width
0 to 8 a)
2
Left
Left edge width
0 to 8 a)
3
Right
Right edge width
0 to 8 a)
4
Bottom
Bottom edge width
0 to 8 a)
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 163) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.
When [Outline] is selected with separate edge on, the [MORE] button lights
amber. Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust
the key fill density parameter with a knob.
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
181
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
4
Density
Outline density
0 to 100
Setting the embossing parameters
When the [EMBOS] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Setting values
1
Width
0 to 4
2
Position
359 to 0
4
Density
0 to 100
Selecting a normal edge
When all five edge type selection buttons are off, a normal edge is selected. If
one of the buttons is lit, press it, turning it off.
Softening the edge
Press the [SOFT EDGE] button, turning it on. The button lights green, and you
can now adjust the softness with the knob.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Soft
Edge softness
0 to 100
• For a normal edge, when [SOFT EDGE] is enabled, “Key Drop” mode turns
on.
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type, and clean
mode is enabled, enabling [SOFT EDGE] ends the clean mode.
Applying the zabton effects
Chapter 4 Keys
Notes
• For key 3 and key 4, the zabton effect is not available.
• For key 1 or key 2, it is not possible to have zabton and [Fine Key] on
simultaneously.
When the [ZABTN] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.
182
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0 to 100
2
Soft
Pattern edge softness
0 to 100
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Press the [MORE] button lit amber, changing it to green, then adjust the
following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0 to 100
2
Saturation
Saturation
0 to 100
3
Hue
Hue
359 to 0
4
Density
Density
0 to 100
Masks
Using the mask
In the key control block, press the [MASK] button, turning it on.
The parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as [Box] or
[Pattern] in the <Mask Source> group of the Main Mask menu for the key.
• When box is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Top
Top position
–100 (shown as –00) to +100
Left
Left position
–100 (shown as –00) to +100
3
Right
Right position
–100 (shown as –00) to +100
4
Bottom
Bottom position
–100 (shown as –00) to +100
When box is selected and the [MORE] button is lit amber, there are more
settings. Press the [MORE] button, so that it changes from amber to green to
make the extra setting.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Soft
Box softness
0 to 100
Chapter 4 Keys
• When pattern is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0 to 100
2
Soft
Edge softness
0 to 100
3
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The pattern is the same as a wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” (page 362).)
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
183
Applying a DME Effect to a Key
Note
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in two
places.
Assigning a DME to a key
1
2
In the key control block, press the delegation buttons [M/E1] and [KEY1].
Using the DME channel selection buttons, select the DME channel
(DME1, DME2) for applying the effect.
The lit colors of the [DME1] and [DME2] buttons indicate the DME
assignment.
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently
selected key.
Off: DME is not assigned.
To select a DME being used by another keyer
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 324).
Selecting the video signal for the DME assigned to a key
For the operating procedure, see“Selecting the video signal for a DME
assigned to a key” (page 174).
Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal
Chapter 4 Keys
1
Holding down the output destination specification button [MON] in the
key control block, use the DME channel selection buttons to select the
DME channel (DME1 or DME2) you want to use.
The selected DME output is assigned to DME MON V and DME MON K.
2
To check the DME assignment status, hold down just the [MON] button.
While it is held down, the lit color of the [DME1] and [DME2] buttons
shows the key assignment status.
Lit green: Shows the DME currently being monitored.
184
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
Lit amber: Shows a DME which can be monitored.
Off: DME is not assigned.
Other Key Setting Operations
Using the show key function
While the [SHOW KEY] button is held down, the key-processed key source
signal appears on the specified output. (Show key mode)
Even when the [SHOW KEY] button is released, for a preset time the show key
mode is maintained. You can specify the output to which the show key function
is applied and set the time for which the show key mode is maintained after
releasing the button in a Setup menu.
For details see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame Memory and Color
Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
Using the auto delegation function
To couple the selection in the key delegation buttons of the independent key
transition control block so that the key control block delegation selection is
automatically switched, in the key control block press the [AUTO DELEG]
button, turning it on.
Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults
Holding down a key type button ([LUM], [LIN], [CRK], [CVK], or [PTN])
recalls the key default values (page 147).
Key modify clear
Chapter 4 Keys
When an M/E delegation button is held down, holding down a key delegation
button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings.
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
185
Resizer
Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking,
magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the
processed key.
The following functions are available.
• Two-dimensional transformations of keys
• Resizer interpolation settings
• Resizer crop/border settings
• Resizer effect settings
(mosaic, defocus)
Notes
For key 3 and key 4, the resizer cannot be used.
• The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay.
• Some effects of resizer are different from what you would expect of DME
effects.
Restrictions on the use of effects
There are restrictions on combined use of resizer effects themselves and that
with DME wipes.
Relation between resizer and other effects
You cannot apply DME effects to a key for which the resizer function is
enabled. When one of the three functions – resizer, DME wipe and DME
effects – is enabled, the other two are disabled.
Chapter 4 Keys
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys
Note
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer is used to
shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen including the added
video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function as required to extract the
4:3 image.
Menu operations for key shrinking, magnification and movement
For example, to shrink, magnify or move key1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
186
Resizer
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Move key
horizontally
HD
–99.9999 to
+99.9999
SD 4:3
–33.3333 to
+33.3333
SD 16:9
–24.9999 to
+24.9999
2
3
Location X
Location Y
Size
Move key vertically HD
Magnify or shrink
key
–99.9999 to
+99.9999
SD 4:3
–33.3333 to
+33.3333
SD 16:9
–24.9999 to
+24.9999
0.0000 to 10.0000
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect X
Change aspect
ratio horizontally
0.0000 to 99.9999
2
Aspect Y
Change aspect
ratio vertically
0.0000 to 99.9999
3
Aspect Ratio
Change aspect
ratio horizontally
and vertically at a
time
0.0000 to 2.0000
Chapter 4 Keys
Resizer
187
Key control block (MKS-8035 Key Control Module, option)
operations for key shrinking, magnification and movement
Delegation buttons
Knobs
RESIZER button
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
P/P
RE
SIZER
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
TRANS
LUM
LIN
CRK
CVK
PTN
AUTO
SEL
SPLIT
MATTE
FILL
KEY
DROP
SOFT
EDGE
BDR
DROP
BDR
SHDW
OUT
LINE
EMBOS
SHOW
KEY
MASK
ZABTN
MORE
DME
1
DME
2
MON
OVER
RIDE
TRACE
AUTO
DELEG
MORE button
1
2
3
Use the delegation buttons to select the key to which you want to apply a
resizer function.
Press the [RESIZER] button, turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.
(To switch between displaying parameter group 1/2 and 2/2, press the
[MORE] button.)
Chapter 4 Keys
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Move key
horizontally
HD
2
188
Resizer
X
Y
–99 to +99
SD 4:3
–33 to +33
SD 16:9
–24 to +24
Move key vertically HD
–99 to +99
SD 4:3
–33 to +33
SD 16:9
–24 to +24
Parameter group [1/2]
Knob Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Magnify or shrink
key
0.0 to 10
S
Parameter group [2/2]
Knob Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
X
Change aspect
ratio horizontally
0.0 to 99
2
Y
Change aspect
ratio vertically
0.0 to 99
3
R
Change aspect
ratio horizontally
and vertically at a
time
0.0 to 2.0
Device control block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module, option)
operations for key shrinking, magnification and movement
RSZR CTRL button
Delegation buttons
Trackball
M/E1
M/E2
M/E3
DME1
DME2
DME5
DME6
DME7
DME8
RUN
CTRL
MENU
LOCAL
K1
CB1
GLB
K2
SRC
K3
TRGT
K4
AXIS
LOC
WIPE
ASP
PERS
LOC
SIZE
ASP
LOC
XYZ
LOC
ROT
POS
RSZR
SHIFT
CLR
WORK
BUFR
X
Y
Z
P/P
USER
DEV
RSZR
CTRL
Chapter 4 Keys
CTR
RSZR button
Z-ring
LOC button
ASP button
1
Press the [RSZR CTRL] button, turning it on.
Resizer
189
2
3
4
Press the delegation button to select the key.
Press the [RSZR] button, turning it on.
• To change the aspect ratio, turn on the [LOC SIZE(ASP)].
• To shrink, magnify, or move the key, turn on the [LOC XYZ(LOC)].
Hold these buttons down while carrying out the operation of step 5 to
enable fine adjustment (fine mode).
5
Use the trackball for the operation.
For details of parameters, see step 3 of “Key control block (MKS-8035 Key
Control Module, option) operations for key shrinking, magnification and
movement” (page 188).
Entering parameters
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter input.
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter
11 (Volume 2).
Resetting parameters
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter resetting.
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter
11 (Volume 2).
Clearing resizer effects
Chapter 4 Keys
To clear three-dimensional transform parameters only and set the
initial state
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the
operation buttons.
To clear all resizer parameters, and set the initial state
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the
operation buttons, twice in rapid succession.
For the initial state, you can select either the factory default settings or user
settings.
For details of how to make this selection, see “Selecting the State After
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
190
Resizer
Resizer Interpolation Settings
For example, to make the interpolation settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Resizer Process].
The Resizer Process menu appears.
3
In the <Video Field/Frame Mode> and other groups, make the
interpolation settings.
Note
These settings are the same as those for input video signals. For details,
see “Interpolation Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
However, the following points are different.
• The signal formats allowing interpolation processing are: 480i/59.94,
576i/50, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, and 1080i/60.
• It is not possible to set [Interpolation Mode].
Resizer Crop/Border Settings
Making a crop setting for a key for which resizer is on
For example, to make the crop settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
Chapter 4 Keys
1
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Border/Crop].
The Border/Crop menu appears.
3
Press [Crop], turning it on.
This enables the adjustment of crop.
Resizer
191
4
Set the parameters.
These settings are the same as those for crop of DME. For details, see
“Crop Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Note
If defocus is enabled, and in the <Defocus Mode> group you select Video/Key,
then the crop is disabled. If mosaic is enabled crop is disabled.
Applying a border to a key for which resizer is on
For example, to add the border for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Border/Crop].
The Border/Crop menu appears.
3
Press [Border], turning it on.
This enables the adjustment of crop.
4
Set the parameters.
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,
as follows.
• SD format
Chapter 4 Keys
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
Values
1
H
Simultaneously adjust width of left 0.00 to 4.00
and right borders
2
V
Simultaneously adjust width of top 0.00 to 3.00 (4:3)
and bottom borders
0.00 to 2.25 (16:9)
3
All
Simultaneously adjust width of all
four borders
Value of H shown
5
Density
Density of the borders
0.00 to 100.00
Values
• HD format
192
Resizer
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
1
H
Simultaneously adjust width of left 0.00 to 12.00 (4:3)
and right borders
0.00 to 16.00 (16:9)
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
2
V
Simultaneously adjust width of top 0.00 to 9.00
and bottom borders
Values
3
All
Simultaneously adjust width of all
four borders
Value of H shown
5
Density
Density of the borders
0.00 to 100.00
To apply color to a border
1
2
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Flat Color].
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
Values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
To soften the inner edge of a border
1
2
In the Border/Crop menu, press [Border Soft].
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
Values
1
Inner Soft
Border inner softness
0.00 to 100.00
To apply a beveled light edge
1
3
Chapter 4 Keys
2
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled
Light Edge].
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
Values
1
Top
Top edge
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Left edge
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Right edge
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Bottom edge
–100.00 to +100.00
5
All
Four edges
Value of Left shown
Press [Border Soft].
Resizer
193
4
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment Setting
Values
1
Inner Soft
Border inner softness
0.00 to 100.00
2
Bound Soft
Border boundary softness
0.00 to 100.00
To apply a beveled color edge
1
2
3
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled
Color Edge].
In the <Color Adjust> group, select the edges for adjustment among the
[Top], [Left], [Right], and [Bottom] edges. To select all the four edges,
press [All].
Set the color parameters.
For details, see “To apply color to a border” (page 193)
4
5
Press [Border Soft].
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Inner Soft
Border inner softness
0.00 to 100.00
2
Bound Soft
Border boundary softness
0.00 to 100.00
Applying Resizer Effects
Chapter 4 Keys
For example, to apply effects to key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.
This enables the resizer function.
2
Press [Enhanced Effect].
The Enhanced Effect menu appears.
194
Resizer
Applying a mosaic
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press
[Mosaic], turning it on.
Set the parameters.
This operation is the same as the DME mosaic setting. For more details,
see “Mosaic Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
3
Set the parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H
Horizontal defocusing
0.00 to 100.00
2
V
Vertical defocusing
0.00 to 100.00
3
All
Horizontal and vertical defocusing H value shown
Defocusing
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press
[Defocus], turning it on.
Set the parameters.
Chapter 4 Keys
This operation is the same as the defocusing setting when using the DME
with the DME dedicated interface.
For more details, see “Defocus Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).
Resizer
195
Key Snapshots
Key settings other than the key on/off status and the key priority can all be
instantaneously saved in a dedicated register, for recall when required. A key
snapshot comprises three values: a cross-point button number, key memory full
mode, and independent key transition, and can be called in any combination.
There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer.
Key Snapshot Operations
Key snapshot operations are carried out in the downstream key control block
(MKS-8032 DSK Fader Module). Each keyer is provided with four dedicated
key snapshot registers.
Key delegation buttons
Key source name display/key snapshot buttons
Key snapshot setting buttons
DSK1
DSK2
UNDO
WIPE
DME
K-SS
DSK3
DSK4
SHIFT
MIX
CUT
K-SS
STORE
Chapter 4 Keys
DSK1
ON
DSK2
ON
DSK3
ON
DSK4
ON
TAKE
TAKE
TAKE
TAKE
Independent key transition type
selection buttons
Independent key transition execution section
Independent key transition control block (MKS-8032)
196
Key Snapshots
Saving a key snapshot
For example, the following procedure saves the state of the DSK1 settings.
1
2
Press the key delegation button [DSK1], turning it on.
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.
The system switches to key snapshot mode, and the key source name
display/key snapshot buttons show the status of registers 1 to 4 for DSK1.
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.
For a register holding a snapshot, the register name is shown as up to eight
characters.
3
Hold down the [K-SS STORE] button, and press the key source name
display/key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you
want to save the snapshot.
The key source name display/key snapshot button which you pressed lights
yellow.
Note
If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or
yellow, the existing contents of the register are overwritten.
Recalling a key snapshot
For example, the following procedure recalls the state of the DSK1 settings.
1
2
3
Press the key delegation button [DSK1], turning it on.
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.
Chapter 4 Keys
Press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to
the register you want to recall.
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the key snapshot.
To cancel the recall, press the [UNDO] button.
Key Snapshots
197
Chapter 4 Keys
198
Key Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
Overview ....................................................................................................200
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings .........................................................201
Wipe Settings Menu ..........................................................................201
Wipe Pattern Selection ......................................................................201
Setting Wipe Modifiers .....................................................................201
Wipe Modify Clear ............................................................................212
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...................................213
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings ......213
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .......................214
Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................................218
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................218
Overview
Chapter 5 Wipes
A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream,
using a wipe pattern.
Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a “background
wipe,” and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a “key wipe.”
There are two types of wipe: those that can be selected in a common transition,
and those that can be selected in an independent key transition.
For details of independent key transitions, see page 133.
200
Overview
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Chapter 5 Wipes
You carry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each
of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.
This section describes the basic procedures for wipe settings, taking the M/E1 >Wipe menu as an example.
For details of independent key transition wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for
Independent Key Transitions” (page 213).
Wipe Settings Menu
Accessing the wipe settings menu
To access the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, use either of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
press VF5 ‘Wipe.’
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type
selection button [WIPE] twice in rapid succession.
Any of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >Wipe menu.
Wipe Pattern Selection
Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘Main Pattern.’
The Main Pattern menu appears.
The patterns appear on the screen.
See “Wipe Pattern List” (page 362).
2
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
Setting Wipe Modifiers
You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern: setting the wipe direction,
pattern position, and so on.
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
201
Specifying the wipe direction (Direction)
You can specify the direction of the wipe: the regular direction is referred to as
“normal,” and the other direction as “reverse.” You can also select alternating
directions each time the transition is completed (normal/reverse mode).
Chapter 5 Wipes
Normal
Reverse
To specify the wipe direction in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Direction> group, specify the wipe direction.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control
block
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.
NORM: Normal
NORM/REV: Normal/reverse
REV: Reverse
202
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Modifying the wipe pattern edge (Edge)
You can apply a border to the pattern, soften the edges, or soften the applied
border.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Soft border
Soft
Border
Border: You can adjust the border width.
Soft: You can adjust the edge softness.
Soft border: You can adjust the border width, and the softness of the inner and
outer edges of the border.
When a border or soft border is selected, the signal filling the border is called
edge fill. For the edge fill, you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color
matte generator, or the signal selected on the utility bus. A matte can be color
1 or color 2, or a combination of the two colors (a “color mix”).
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.
Border: border
Soft: soft edge
Soft Border: soft border
3
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2.
• When border is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Border width
0.00 to 100.00
• When soft edge is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
• When soft border is selected
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
203
Knob
4
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Border width
0.00 to 100.00
2
Inner Soft
Border inner softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Outer Soft
Border outer softness
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 5 Wipes
When you selected border or soft border, select the edge fill signal in the
<Edge Fill> group.
Utility Bus: signal selected on the utility bus
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator
5
Depending on the operation in step 4, carry out the following operation.
When ‘Utility Bus’ is selected: Press the key delegation [UTIL], and
select the signal in the key row.
When ‘Matte’ is selected: In the same Edge/Direction menu, press [Matte
Adjust] to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the single-color
or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a singlecolor matte or a two-color combination in the <Edge Matte> group.
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
When you select [Mix Color] for a two-color combination, see the next
paragraph.
Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte
When you selected [Matte] for the border or soft border edge fill, you can
combine color 1 and color 2.
For the combination, you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern, but
also the dedicated color mix pattern.
1
In the <Edge Fill> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select [Matte], and
press [Matte Adjust].
The Matte Adjust menu appears.
2
3
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.
In the <Mix Pattern> group, make one of the following selections.
Wipe: Use the wipe pattern selected for the transition.
204
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Pattern: Use the dedicated pattern.
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, set the following parameters.
• When Wipe is selected
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
Chapter 5 Wipes
Knob
• When Pattern is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The patterns are the same as for a wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” (page 362).
If you selected Pattern, you can also carry out the pattern selection by
pressing the [Mix Ptn Select] button in the Matte Adjust menu, to display
the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn
Select menu (wipe patterns 1 to 24) by pressing the appropriate button, and
you can then adjust the following parameters.
5
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
If you selected Pattern in step 4, if required, the following modifiers can
be added. After selecting a wipe mix, skip to step 6.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
• When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
205
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
a) See page 211.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Chapter 5 Wipes
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant rate
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 209.
6
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,
then adjust the parameters.
Knob
7
206
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)
When you turn on this function, you can move the wipe pattern to any position.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Positioner off
Positioner on
• The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern.
A negative value moves the pattern to the left, and a positive value moves the
pattern to the right.
• The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern.
A negative value moves the pattern down, and a positive value moves the
pattern up.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on, and set the pattern
position.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00
To return the pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through
the course of a transition
In the <Position> group, press [Auto Center], turning it on.
To set the wipe position using the trackball
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball in the device control
block.
1
In the device control block, press the [M/E1] or [P/P] button, turning it on.
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
207
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position
setting as follows.
Table1: Buttons and assigned settings
Button name
Setting
Wipe
Wipe position for common transition.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions
2
3
4
Button name
Function
POS
Toggle Position on or off.
X, Y
Fix the operating direction.
CTR
Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.
Press the [WIPE] button, turning it on.
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to
the vertical direction.
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)
You can rotate the pattern. There are three rotation modes, as follows.
Angle
This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle.
Angle off
Angle on
The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation.
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one whole turn
clockwise.
208
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
With a value of 0.00 there is no rotation.
Speed
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified
speed.
Chapter 5 Wipes
The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation.
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one turn per second
clockwise. With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
Magnitude
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the
specified angle.
The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the
beginning of the transition.
• A value of –100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn
counterclockwise.
• A value of +100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn
clockwise.
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the
course of the transition.
• A value of –200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise.
• A value of +200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise.
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
209
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Rotation> group, select the rotation type.
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.
Speed: Rotate at a fixed rate.
Magnitude: Rotate through a particular angle during the course of the
transition.
Chapter 5 Wipes
3
According to the selection in step 2, set the following parameters.
• When Angle is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00
• When Speed is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00
• When Magnitude is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation at start of –100.00 to +100.00
transition
Setting values
2
Magnitude
Angle of rotation through course
of transition
–200.00 to +200.00
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)
You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern.
Aspect off
Aspect on
A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically; a
positive value stretches the pattern horizontally.
1
210
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
3
Press [Aspect], turning it on.
Set the following parameter.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 5 Wipes
Knob
Setting the wipe pattern replication (Multi)
The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both, up to 63
times. You can also change the orientation of alternate copies, or change the
position.
“Multi” on
“Multi” off
• The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications
horizontally, and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern
replications vertically.
You can use the “Invert Type” parameter to select from the following four
types of replication patterns.
1
2
3
4
1: All replications in the same orientation
2: Even-numbered rows staggered
3: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted
4: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted, and even-numbered rows
staggered
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
211
The Main Modify menu appears.
2
3
Press the [Multi] button, turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4
Wipe Modify Clear
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press VF5 ‘Wipe’ to return the wipe settings to their initial status.
For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial
status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 78).
212
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings
Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions
Chapter 5 Wipes
You carry out independent key/downstream key transition wipe setting
operations using the Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.
For an overview of independent key transitions, see “What is an independent
key transition?” (page 133).
This section describes the independent key transition wipe settings, taking the
M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu as an example.
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe
Settings
Accessing the independent key transition wipe settings menu
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu,
carry out the following operation.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1] and
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for
key 1, then press [Wipe Adjust].
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition
>Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1 Wipe
Adjust menu).
Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern
You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed
in the menu.
Note
In an independent key transition, you can only use the patterns 1 to 24.
To select a wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select [Pattern Select].
The Pattern Select menu appears.
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
213
2
Press the button for the desired pattern.
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers
Available modifiers
Chapter 5 Wipes
You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe.
Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using.
• Direction
• Edge
• Positioner
• Rotation
• Aspect ratio
• Pattern replication
Setting the wipe direction (Direction)
In the <Direction> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, make any of the
following selections.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
Softening the wipe pattern edge (Soft edge)
1
2
Press [Soft] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
Set the following parameter.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)
There are two methods of setting the wipe position: using the device control
block, or in a menu.
To set the wipe position using the trackball
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball in the device control
block.
1
214
In the device control block, press the [M/E1] or [P/P] button, turning it on.
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position
setting as follows.
Table 1: Buttons and assigned settings
Setting
K1 CB1
Wipe position for independent key 1 transition
K2
Wipe position for independent key 2 transition
K3
Wipe position for independent key 3 transition
K4
Wipe position for independent key 4 transition
Chapter 5 Wipes
Button name
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions
Button name
2
3
4
Function
POS
Toggle Position on or off.
X, Y
Fix the operating direction.
CTR
Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.
Press one of the buttons in Table 1 above, to select the wipe position to
which the operation applies. Multiple selection is possible.
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to
the vertical direction.
To set the wipe position by a menu operation
1
2
Press [Position] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through
the course of a transition
Press [Auto Center] in the <Position> group, turning it on.
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
215
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)
1
In the <Rotation> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select the rotation
type.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.
Speed: Rotate at a speed rate.
Magnitude: Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course of
the transition.
2
According to the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.
• When Angle is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
• When Speed is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 209.
• When Magnitude is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation at start of –100.00 to +100.00 a)
transition
Setting values
2
Magnitude
Angle of rotation through course
of transition
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 209.
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)
1
2
Press [Aspect] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
Set the following parameter.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
216
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
Replicating the wipe pattern (Multi)
1
2
Press [Multi] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
Chapter 5 Wipes
Knob
a) See page 211.
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
217
Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 5 Wipes
You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of
its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required.
There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST
bank.
Use the menu to save and recall wipe snapshots.
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus
Menus used
As an example, when operating on M/E-1, select M/E-1 >Wipe >Wipe
Snapshot.
The Wipe Snapshot menu appears.
Memory recall buttons
Button displays
In setup you can select whether the memory recall buttons show the pattern
number or register name.
See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
218
Wipe Snapshots
Saving a wipe snapshot from the menu
1
2
3
Set up the wipe you want to save.
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Store], lighting it amber.
Press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to save.
Chapter 5 Wipes
Note
If you press a button which is already lit, this overwrites the contents of the
register.
Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press the memory recall button for the wipe
snapshot you want to recall.
This recalls the wipe snapshot, and the button you pressed lights amber.
In the upper left is shown the currently recalled register name or number.
Note
The Flexi Pad and menu settings are linked.
A setting in setup determines whether register names or pattern numbers
appear.
Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu
1
2
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Delete].
Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to delete.
This deletes the wipe snapshot.
Wipe Snapshots
219
Chapter 5 Wipes
220
Wipe Snapshots
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Overview ....................................................................................................222
Types of DME Wipe Pattern .............................................................222
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers .....................................229
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ............................230
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings ...............................................232
DME Wipe Settings Menu ................................................................232
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ............................................................232
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers ...........................................................234
DME Wipe Modify Clear ..................................................................241
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .........................242
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings
.................................................................................................242
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers ..............243
Resizer DME Wipe Setting ......................................................................246
DME Wipe Snapshots ..............................................................................248
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................248
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .......................................249
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .....................................249
Overview
A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one
video image to the next.
There are two types of DME wipe: those which can be selected for a normal
transition, and those which can be selected for an independent key transition.
For details of independent key transitions, see page 133.
A DME wipe is only possible when using the resizer or a switcher with
incorporated DME.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Types of DME Wipe Pattern
The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes.
Preset patterns: predetermined fixed patterns
User programmable DME patterns: patterns which you can create using
keyframe effects
DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be
used
There are three DME wipe execution modes, depending on the number of
DME channels available: one-channel mode and two-channel mode. The
pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as follows.
Execution mode
Preset pattern numbers User programmable DME pattern
that can be used
numbers that can be used
One-channel mode
1000 series
1901 to 1999
Two-channel mode
2000 series
2901 to 2999
DME wipe pattern groups
The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups.
For each group (excluding user programmable DMEs), for schematic patterns
and numbers, see “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page
363). The black part of the pattern represents the old video, and the white part
the new video, with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow.
222
Overview
Overview
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Slide: The new video slides in over the old video.
(Pattern numbers: 1001 to 1008 (one-channel mode), 2601 to 2608 (twochannel mode))
Squeeze: The new video appears squeezed over the old video, and
progressively expands to cover it.
(Pattern numbers: 1021 to 1031 (one-channel mode), 2621 to 2628 (twochannel mode))
Door: The new video moves like a door closing, and progressively covers the
old video.
(Pattern numbers: 1041 to 1048 (one-channel mode))
Flip tumble: The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new
video. During the transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E
bank appears as the background.
(Pattern numbers: 1101 to 1104, 1109, 1110, 1121, 1122, 1124, 1131 to
1133, 1135 (one-channel mode))
Frame in-out: Completed in two transitions. In the first transition, the new
video appears, then on the second transition the new video goes out and the
old video returns.
(Pattern numbers: 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224 (one-channel mode), 2851
to 2854, 2861 to 2864 (two-channel mode))
Picture-in-picture: The one-channel mode and two-channel mode differ as
follows.
In one-channel mode, this completes in two transitions. In the first
transition, the old video shrinks, and the new video appears behind it.
In the second transition, the old video expands again until it is its original
size.
(Pattern number: 1251 (one-channel mode))
In two-channel mode, in the first half of the transition, the old video
shrinks, and the new video appears. In the second half of the transition, the
new video expands, and the old video disappears. You can move the
pattern from the current position by a relative amount. During the
transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E bank appears as the
background.
(Pattern numbers: 2651 and 2652 (two-channel mode))
2D trans: The new video appears over the old video, while undergoing
expansion, two-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 1051 to 1058, 1061 to 1064, 1068 (one-channel mode))
3D trans: In one-channel mode, the new video appears over the old video,
while undergoing expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 1071, 1072, 1074, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1091 to 1094 (onechannel mode))
In two-channel mode, the old video changes to the new video while both
undergo expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.
(Pattern numbers: 2631 to 2634, 2642, 2644 (two-channel mode))
223
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Mosaic: In the first half of the transition, a mosaic is gradually applied to the
old video, then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video.
In the second half, the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced,
returning to the original image at 100%.
(Pattern number: 1701 (one-channel mode))
Defocus: In the first half of the transition, the old video is gradually defocused,
then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video. In the
second half, the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced,
returning to the original image at 100%.
(Pattern number: 1702 (one-channel mode))
Brick: A brick such that the side surface is visible slides in over the old video,
then rotates so that the new video can be seen.
(Pattern numbers: 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814 (two-channel mode))
User programmable DME: Using a DME keyframe effect created with a
keyframe operation, this executes a DME wipe.
Pattern numbers: 1901 to 1999 (one-channel mode), 2901 to 2999 (twochannel mode)
For details of creating keyframe effects, see “Creating User
Programmable DME Patterns” (page 249).
In an independent key transition, you can use the following patterns. It is not
possible to use two-channel mode patterns.
Execution mode
DME wipe patterns that can be used
One-channel mode
Slide, squeeze, door, 2D trans, 3D trans, frame in-out, and user
programmable DME
User programmable DME in transition mode
For the transition mode set when creating a keyframe effect for a user
programmable DME pattern, the following can be used.
• Single: single transition mode
• Flip tumble (Flip Tumble): flip tumble transition mode
• Dual: dual transition mode
• Picture-in-picture (PinP): one-channel and two-channel picture-in-picture
transition mode
• Compress: a type of picture-in-picture, in which the new image is the
background, and the currently visible image shrinks, and then expands to its
original size. (See example in the next item.)
• Frame in-out (Frame I/O): frame in-out transition mode. When the first
transition completes, if you move the position of the image, you can move it
both horizontally and vertically.
• Frame in-out H (Frame I/O H): a type of frame in-out mode, which is
specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction.
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end
point. (See page 226.)
224
Overview
The operation is carried out according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or
1204.
• Frame in-out V (Frame I/O V): a type of frame in-out mode, which is
specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction.
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end
point. (See page 227.)
Transition mode “Compress”
The change in the image when the transition mode is set to “Compress” is as
follows, in comparison to the case of “Picture-in-picture.”
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Picture-inpicture” (one-channel mode)
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
First stroke
Second stroke
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Compress”
First stroke
Second stroke
Transition mode “frame in-out”
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions, but the image
position at the transition start point and end point does not change.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
Overview
225
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Background A
Background B
Effect execution
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Background A
Effect execution
Background B
State before
modification
Transition mode “frame in-out H”
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal
direction.
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image at the
transition start point and end point also moves.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
226
Overview
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Background A
Background B
Effect execution
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Background A
Effect execution
Background B
State before
modification
Transition mode “frame in-out V”
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical
direction.
In this mode, in the state at completion of the first transition, you can move the
image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image
at the transition start point and end point also moves.
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.
Overview
227
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Background A
Effect execution
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Background B
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.
Transition start
First transition
completion point
Transition end
Image created
by interpolation
Effect execution
Background A
Background B
State before
modification
228
Overview
Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe
For a two-channel mode brick, frame in-out, and so on, the part of the pattern
shown in gray (see page 367) is filled with the signal selected on the DME
external video bus.
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers
You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary
wipe pattern, as follows.
For the setting operations, see “Setting DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 234).
Overview
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Direction: You can set the DME wipe direction to normal, reverse, or
alternating normal/reverse (see page 234), except for a key transition,
which is always in normal/reverse mode. However, a key transition can
only be specified when the following patterns are selected, and when other
patterns are selected, this is fixed, as normal/reverse.
Patterns: 1204, 1207, 1221 to 1224
Edge: You can apply a border or soft border (see page 234).
In the case of those user programmable DME patterns for keys in which an
edge has already been applied to the effect, the behavior is as follows.
• When the DME wipe edge setting is on, only part of the edge applied in
the effect is enabled, and that portion can be adjusted (page 234).
• When the DME wipe edge setting is off, the edge applied in the effect is
enabled as is.
Positioner: You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an
arbitrary position. Using the position select function, you can also
instantaneously move the pattern.
• 1031
When this pattern number is selected, with the progress of the transition
the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position
toward the center of the screen (see page 235). In other words, the effect
obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to
“AUTO CENTER”.
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position
when the first transition completes.
• 2651, 2652
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can move the pattern for
each channel, or with values relative to the current position the two
channels simultaneously.
• 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814
When the these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the vertical
position as the brick slides in.
229
• 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position
for each channel setting when the first transition completes.
Pattern limit: You can restrict the range of the transition as desired. However,
this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition
control block.
For more details, see “Pattern Limit” (page 122).
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Size: This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is
selected.
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251
• 2651, 2652, 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864
You can set the size of the image.
Crop: You can crop the image. It is also possible in 16:9 mode to crop both
sides, to convert the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio. For the execution of a
DME wipe crop transition, you can select from the following three
possibilities.
• Cut
• Last 5%
• Linear
When [Last 5%] is selected, you can set the [Release Transition] as
follows.
• Last 30%
• Last 5%
• Off
Note
When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects
The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows.
Relation to ordinary wipes
• DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher. Therefore,
during the execution of a DME wipe, you can still use a pattern produced by
the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask.
• A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask.
230
Overview
Relation to processed keys
When using the DME for a processed key, if you select a DME wipe, an
available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe. If all of the DME
channels are in use, then it is not possible to select a DME wipe.
If in a Setup menu a setting has been made for DME allocation, that Setup
menu setting takes precedence (see “Setting the assignments of DME channels
to use on the individual M/E banks” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
Relation to resizer
It is not possible to select a DME wipe for a key having the resizer enabled.
Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a
single M/E bank
Overview
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME wipes can be used in five places, including the four independent key
transitions.
It is not possible to use two or more of these places simultaneously.
231
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
You carry out DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe
menu for each bank.
This section describes the basic procedures for DME wipe settings, taking the
M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu as an example.
For details of independent key transition DME wipe settings, see “DME Wipe
Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 242).
DME Wipe Settings Menu
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Accessing the DME Wipe menu
To access the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, use either of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe.’
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type
selection button [DME] twice in rapid succession.
Either of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu.
DME Wipe Pattern Selection
Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘1ch’ for one-channel mode
and select HF2 ‘2ch’ for two-channel mode.
Select the DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons.
•
•
•
•
•
•
232
Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze
Door: door
Frame I/O: frame in-out
2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D trans and 3D trans
Mosaic/Defocus: mosaic and defocus
Brick: brick
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
• User Program: user programmable DME
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”
(page 222) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” (page 363).
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.
3
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
Note
For a key transition, the picture-in-picture cannot be used.
Adjusting DME wipe pattern parameters
Of the DME wipe patterns, the following have parameters that can be adjusted.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Side V Size X
Horizontal magnification
0.01 to 8.00
2
Side V Size Y
Vertical magnification
0.01 to 8.00
3
Height
Height of brick
0.01 to 100.00
4
Center X
Horizontal center position
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
5
Center Y
Vertical center position
–100.00 to +100.00 b)
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
When Brick (for two channels) is selected (pattern numbers 2801
to 2804, 2811 to 2814)
a) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the left
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.
b) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.
When Frame in-out (for two channels) is selected
• Pattern numbers 2851 to 2854
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
5
Delay
Timing for video selected on –100.00 to +100.00
a utility bus to appear on the
screen
Setting values
• Pattern numbers 2861 to 2864
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Rot X
Rotation about the Y axis
(horizontal direction)
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Rot Y
Rotation about the X axis
(vertical direction)
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Rot Z
Rotation about the Z axis
–100.00 to +100.00
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
233
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
5
Delay
Timing for video selected on –100.00 to +100.00
a utility bus to appear on the
screen
Setting values
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers
You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern: setting the DME
wipe direction, pattern position, and so on.
For an overview of the DME wipe modifiers, see “DME Wipe Pattern
Variation and Modifiers” (page 229).
Specifying the DME wipe direction (Direction)
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
You can specify the DME wipe direction (normal/reverse).
To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
In the <Direction>group, specify the DME wipe direction.
Normal: regular direction
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition
Reverse: reverse direction to normal
To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition
control block
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.
NORM: Normal
NORM/REV: Normal/Reverse
REV: Reverse
Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’
The Edge/Direction menu appears.
2
234
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or twochannel mode, proceed as follows.
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.
Border: border
Soft Border: soft border
4
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3.
• When border is selected
Knob
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Border width
0.00 to 100.00
3
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
4
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
5
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Parameter
• When soft border is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Border width
0.00 to 100.00
2
Inner Soft
Border inner softness
0.00 to 100.00
3
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
4
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
5
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
235
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
4
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00
2
V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern
(position select)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
In the <Position Select> group, the one of the [Top Left], [Top Right],
[Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right] buttons that is on indicates the current
display position of the DME wipe pattern.
2
3
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.
In one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
In two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select the
corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at the
same time.
4
236
To move the position of the DME wipe pattern, press the button where you
want to move to, turning it on.
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of
the specified button.
Setting relative positions to move the DME wipe pattern
In two-channel mode, use the following procedure.
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
3
4
In the <Ch Select> group, select the target channels.
Press [Position] in the <Position> group, turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
4
Relative H
Relative movement in the
horizontal direction
–400.00 to +400.00
5
Relative V
Relative movement in the vertical
direction
–400.00 to +400.00
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Knob
For details of the method of DME wipe pattern selection, see “DME Wipe
Pattern Selection” (page 232).
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or twochannel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
4
Press [Size], turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Set size of effect
0.00 to 200.00 a)
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
237
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping
Note
When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or twochannel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at
the same time. Some patterns need no selection which is fixed in the
<Ch Select> group.
3
4
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop], turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Crop the top of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Crop the left of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Crop the right of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Crop the bottom of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same
time
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the
settings on the other channels by the same amount.
In 16:9 mode, to crop to 4:3 aspect ratio
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3], turning it on.
238
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’
The Modify menu appears.
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or twochannel mode, proceed as follows.
For a pattern in one-channel mode: in the <Ch Select> group, press [1st
Ch], turning it on.
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select
the corresponding channels. You can select more than one channel at
the same time.
3
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
4
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop from 16:9
to 4:3 aspect ratio), turning it on.
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
5
In the <Crop Transition> group, select the execution mode for the DME
wipe crop transition.
Cut: Cut mode. The cropping does not change during the transition, but at
the end point of the transition the cropping is removed (enlarges).
Last 5%: The cropping is maintained for the first 95% of the transition,
and is progressively removed during the last 5% of the transition
(enlarges).
Linear: The cropping is removed linearly through the whole course of the
transition (enlarges).
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
239
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
y
Transition
Cropping
y
y
(%)
100
(%)
100
(%)
100
95
t
0
100 (%)
t
0
[Cut]
95 100 (%)
[Last 5%]
t
0
100 (%)
[Linear]
t: transition execution time
y: change in transition and cropping amount
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Setting the timing of transition completion
When the execution mode for a DME wipe crop transition is set to [Last 5%],
you can select the timing of transition completion from 70% ([Last 30%]), 95%
([Last 5%]), and 100% ([Off]).
1
In the M/E 1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify’.
The Modify menu appears.
2
In the <Crop Mode> group select [Remove From Begin].
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
3
In the <Release Transition> group, select the timing of transition
completion.
Last 30%: The transition completes at the end of 70% of the transition
execution time. The transition has a dead zone from 70% to 95% of the
transition time.
Last 5%: The transition completes at the end of 95% of the transition
execution time. When the transition completes, the cropping is
removed during the last 5%.
Off: The transition completes at the end of the transition execution time.
During the last 5% of the transition, the transition and cropping
removal proceed together.
240
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
y
(%)
100
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
Transition
Cropping
y
“Dead Zone”
y
(%)
100
(%)
100
95
0
t
70
95 100 (%)
t
0
[Last 30%]
70
[Last 5%]
95 100 (%)
t
0
95 100 (%)
[Off]
t: transition execution time
y: change in transition and cropping amount
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME Wipe Modify Clear
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe’ to return the DME wipe settings to their initial status.
For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in
initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 78).
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings
241
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key
Transitions
You carry out independent key/downstream key transition DME wipe setting
operations using the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.
For an overview of independent key transitions, see page 133.
This section describes the independent key transition DME wipe settings,
taking the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust menu as an example.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME
Wipe Settings
Accessing the independent key transition DME wipe settings
menu
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust
menu, carry out the following operation.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for
key 1. Next, press [DME Wipe Adjust].
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition
>DME Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1
DME Wipe Adjust menu).
Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern
You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns
displayed in the menu.
To select a DME wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the
following procedure.
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[1ch].
The Pattern Select menu appears.
2
242
Select the DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons.
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
•
•
•
•
•
Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze
Door: door
Frame I/O: frame in-out
2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D trans and 3D trans
User Program: user programmable DME
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”
(page 222) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” (page 363).
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.
3
Press the button to select the desired pattern.
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe
Modifiers
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
You can add modifiers such as pattern position and size for an independent key
transition DME wipe.
For introductory information, see “Setting the DME wipe position
(Positioner)” (page 235) and “Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)” (page
237).
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 229.
1
2
In the <Position> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Position], turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00
2
V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen
In the <Position> group, press [Center].
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 230.
1
In the Key 1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Size], turning it on.
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
243
2
Set the following parameter.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Set size of effect
0.00 to 200.00 a)
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.
Cropping a key DME wipe
1
2
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
Set the following parameters.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Cropping of the top of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Cropping of the left of the image
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Cropping of the right of the image –100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Cropping of the bottom of the
image
–100.00 to +100.00
To crop to 4:3 in 16:9 mode
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3 Crop], turning it on.
To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution
1
2
3
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop to 4:3 in
16:9 mode), turning it on.
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].
The Remove From Begin menu appears.
For subsequent operations, see step 5 of “To set the action when a DME
wipe crop transition is executed” (page 239).
To set the timing of transition completion
1
244
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[Crop], turning it on.
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
2
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].
For subsequent operations, see “Setting the timing of transition
completion” (page 240).
Applying a border to a key DME wipe
In the <Edge> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Border],
turning it on.
For subsequent operations, use the same process as in step 4 of “Modifying the
DME wipe pattern edge” (page 234).
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
245
Resizer DME Wipe Setting
A DME wipe is only possible when using the resizer or a switcher with
incorporated DME.
Notes
• It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for key 3 or key 4.
• When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer DME
wipe is used to shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen
including the added video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function
as required to extract the 4:3 image.
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
DME wipe patterns available for resizer DME wipe
You can use the following patterns of the DME wipe pattern one-channel mode
that can be used in a resizer DME wipe. (7000-series numbers)
• Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)
• Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)
• frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)
Relation between DME wipes and other effects
The following relations hold between a resizer DME wipe and other effects.
Relation to processed keys
It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key with processed key
enabled.
Relation to resizer
It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key with resizer enabled.
Making resizer DME wipe settings
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press
[1ch].
The 1ch Pattern Select menu appears.
2
Select [Resizer Slide/Squeeze] or [Resizer Frame I/O].
The patterns of the selected group appear.
The wipe patterns that can be used for a resizer DME wipe are as follows.
• Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)
246
Resizer DME Wipe Setting
• Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)
• Frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)
3
Press the desired pattern to select it.
For more about resizer DME wipe modifiers, see “Setting Independent
Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 243).
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Resizer DME Wipe Setting
247
DME Wipe Snapshots
You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current
settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when
required.
There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M/E and P/P banks.
Use the menu to save and recall these registers
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
In the same way as for wipe snapshots, you can save, recall, and delete DME
snapshots.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Wipe Snapshot Operations With
the Menus” (page 218).
248
DME Wipe Snapshots
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
With a user programmable DME, you can use DME effects created through the
use of keyframes for a transition on the switcher system.
Note the following points when creating a keyframe effect for use as a user
programmable DME pattern.
Register numbers and pattern numbers
When saving a keyframe effect as a user programmable DME pattern, specify
the register number that corresponds to the pattern number as shown in the
following table.
Register number
Pattern number
One-channel mode
101 to 199
1901 to 1999
Two-channel mode
201 to 299
2901 to 2999
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Execution mode
For details of registers and keyframe effects, see Chapter 13 “Keyframe
Effects” (Volume 2), respectively.
Keyframe effects in the global channel
When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on
the DME global (GLBL) channel, executing the user programmable DME will
also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously.
When executing a user programmable DME, take note of whether the effect is
present on the global channel.
User Programmable DME Transition Mode
To create a user programmable DME, it is necessary to set the transition mode
(the way in which the effect moves). To set the transition mode, use the Key
Frame >DME User PGM menu.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Transition Mode Settings for
User Programmable DME” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
249
The following transition modes are available.
Channels
Transition mode
Effect group
One-channel mode
Single transition mode
Slide, Squeeze, Door, Flip
tumble, Frame in-out, 2D
trans, 3D trans
Flip Tumble
Flip Tumble, Mosaic, Defocus
Frame in-out
Frame in-out
Frame in-out H a)
Frame in-out
Frame in-out V
Picture-in-picture
Two-channel mode
Frame in-out
b)
Picture-in-picture
Compress c)
Picture-in-picture
Dual transition mode
Slide, Squeeze, 3D Trans
Two-channel picture-in-picture
Picture-in-picture
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
a) Transition according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or 1204
b) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1201
c) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1251
For details, see “Overview” (page 222).
Note
For the following group of effects available in two-channel mode, no user
programmable DME wipe patterns can be created.
Frame in-out, Brick
Notes on creating keyframe effects
When creating a keyframe effect to be used as a user programmable DME
pattern, note the following, depending on the transition mode used.
Notes on single transition mode (one-channel mode)
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the last keyframe to be a full-size image.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Single].
Notes on flip tumble (one-channel mode)
• Create the first keyframe image at full size. In the <Back> group of the DME
>Input/Output >Video/Key menu, depending on the direction of the rotation
you want during the transition, press [H Invert] or [V Invert], turning it on.
• Create the last keyframe with the image inverted so the back side is visible,
and with the size at full size.
250
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Flip Tumble].
Notes on frame in-out (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O].
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Notes on Frame in-out H (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image
horizontally to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the
[PAUSE] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause
for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe move the image horizontally to place it outside the
screen area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible
within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O H].
Notes on frame in-out V (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image vertically
to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button
in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe move the image vertically to place it outside the screen
area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible within the
screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [FRAME I/O V].
Notes on picture-in-picture (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
251
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [P In P].
Notes on compress (one-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.
• Create the first keyframe with the image at full size.
• In the state at completion of the first transition, create the image to be visible
within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe
control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.
• For the last keyframe, once again set the image size to full size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Compress].
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Notes on dual transition mode (two-channel mode)
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: create the image full-size.
Channel 2: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.
Channel 2: create the image full-size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [Dual].
Notes on picture-in-picture (two-channel mode)
Create a minimum of three keyframes.
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: create the image full-size.
Channel 2: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so
no particular restrictions apply.
In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch2 >Combiner menu, when setting the priority
of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 1 priority higher.
• In the intermediate part of the transition, create the two images so that both
are visible within the screen. In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch2 >Combiner
menu, when setting the priority of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 2
priority higher.
It is recommended to make the priority settings at a keyframe point at which
the two images are not overlapping.
252
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
• During the course of a transition, there is a “dead zone” corresponding to the
intermediate point of the whole effect (see following figure), during which
the image does not change. Therefore, it is necessary to create the effect so
that the image in the intermediate part of the transition is the keyframe for
the mid-point of the whole effect. The range of this “dead zone” corresponds
to the central one-third of the range of the transition indicator. This also
applies to an auto transition.
Change in image through transition
Image at point C
appears
Keyframe effect
A
B
C
Image at point B
Last keyframe appears
(dead zone)
Mid-point of effect
First keyframe
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
Image at point A
appears
Transition indicator
Fader lever
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.
Channel 1: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so
no particular restrictions apply.
Channel 2: create the image full-size.
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,
select [P In P].
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
253
Chapter 6 DME Wipes
254
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Overview ....................................................................................................256
Still Image Operations .............................................................................259
Preparations .......................................................................................259
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ..............................................260
Selecting an Input Image ...................................................................263
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ..................................264
Capturing and Saving an Input Image ...............................................265
Recalling Still Images .......................................................................269
Image Processing ...............................................................................271
Image Output .....................................................................................276
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) .................................277
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation) ........279
Frame Memory Clip Function ................................................................282
Frame Memory Clip Operations .............................................................284
Preparations for Operation ................................................................284
Recalling Clips ..................................................................................284
Clip Playback ....................................................................................286
Clip Creation .....................................................................................290
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders ................................292
Clip Output ........................................................................................293
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data .......................................293
Clip Transition Operations ......................................................................296
Image Data Management .........................................................................299
Pair File Processing ...........................................................................299
Moving Files ......................................................................................300
Deleting Files ....................................................................................301
Renaming Files ..................................................................................302
External Hard Disk Drive Access ...........................................................303
Hard Disk Formatting ........................................................................303
Saving Files .......................................................................................304
Recalling Files ...................................................................................305
Overview
Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and
written to memory, for further use as material for editing.
You can also play recorded frame memory clips (movies).
Frame capacity
The maximum number of images that can be written to memory is as follows.
(Without ancillary data)
Video format
Memory capacity
1080i/50
Approx. 1000 frames
1080i/59.94
720P/50
Approx. 2300 frames
720P/59.94
(With ancillary data)
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Video format
Memory capacity
1080i/50
Approx. 700 frames
1080i/59.94
Approx. 800 frames
720P/50
Approx. 1400 frames
720P/59.94
Approx. 1700 frames
SD system:
(Without ancillary data)
Video format
Memory capacity
480i/59.94
Approx. 5600 frames
576i/50
Approx. 4800 frames
(With ancillary data)
Video format
Memory capacity
480i/59.94
Approx. 4700 frames
576i/50
Approx. 3900 frames
For details of operating procedures, see “Still Image Operations” (page 259).
Types of image and terminology used
The following types of image are handled in frame memory.
256
Overview
Freeze image: An input image that has been frozen, but not saved to memory.
Still image: A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file. Each file
(still file) holds just one still image.
Frame memory clip: A clip consists of a sequence of still images, which
appears as a movie on playback. In this manual this is also referred to
simply as a “clip.” The files (still files) constituting clips are referred to as
a “clip file.”
When the above distinctions are not being made, an image is simply referred
to as an “image.”
Use of frame memory
There are eight frame memory channels, FM1 to FM8, and each channel
independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled.
By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross-point buttons you can use the still image
output or clip output from each channel as input material.
Correspondence between input and output
There are two buses for capturing frame memory material: the frame memory
source 1 bus and the frame memory source 2 bus.
These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output, FM1&2,
FM3&4, FM5&6, and FM7&8. You can freeze a frame in each channel
separately, or freeze in the two channels simultaneously.
The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows.
Frame memory source bus 1
Frame memory source bus 2
Output
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Input
Pair mode
By enabling the pair mode, you can link FM1 and FM2, FM3 and FM4, FM5
and FM6, and FM7 and FM8. For example, when a freeze or image processing
is carried out on FM1, the same operation is carried out on FM2. The same
applies to the other pairs. When a pair of images are captured in pair mode, the
image frozen in FM1 (3, 5, or 7) is referred to as the main file and the other
frozen in FM2 (4, 6, or 8) is referred to as the sub file.
Overview
257
Pair files and single files
A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a “pair file.” A pair file can
be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the
coupling function (see page 299) to combine two single files.
A file other than a pair file is termed a “single file.” A single file can be created
by switching off pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the separation
function (see page 300) to split a pair file.
Operation modes
The frame memory has the following operation mode.
V/K mode: When the pair mode is active, the key signal is automatically
selected on frame memory source bus 2. This is convenient for handling
the video and key signals together in frame memory. For example, when
you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1, the key signal
assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2. You
can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus
2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1.
To change the pair mode or operation mode, use the Frame Memory menu.
Frame memory folders
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups.
Such a group is called a “frame memory folder.” Folders can be added or
deleted, and can be given a name of up to 8 characters.
Notes
• When the system is powered off, the folder names are deleted. The folder
names need to be saved on media.
• The following names cannot be used for folders.
Flash1, Flash2
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
A folder named “Default” is provided, and this folder cannot be renamed or
deleted.
• Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the
same name.
258
Overview
Still Image Operations
The frame memory functions provides the following still image file functions.
• Freezing an input image
• Saving a still image
• Recalling a still image
• Processing an image
• Image output
• Continuously capturing images (record)
• Recalling a continuous sequence of images (animation)
For an overview of frame memory concepts, see “Overview” (page 256).
Note
During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 286), frame memory operations may not
be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip
playback.
Preparations
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Allocating the frame memory outputs (FM1 to FM8) to crosspoint buttons
To output a frame memory image to a monitor, for example, the output signal
from the frame memory (FM1 to FM8) must be allocated to a cross-point
button. Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu.
Accessing the Frame Memory menu
Most frame memory operations are carried out using the Frame Memory menu.
To access the Frame Memory menu, use either of the following procedures.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [FRAME
MEM].
• Press the cross-point button to which the frame memory output is allocated
twice in rapid succession.
Still Image Operations
259
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu
The menu screen consists of the following principal parts.
The frame memory selection area display is the same for all except the Pattern
Adjust/Pattern Select/File (excluding Pair Recombination menu)/Folder/
External HDD menus.
1 Auto store status display
2 Display of available image capacity
4 Pair selection button
Frame memory
selection area 3Target FM
5 Pair button
selection buttons
7Frame
memory
folder
selection
area
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
6 File selection area
8Direct
Recall
button
Frame Memory menu
a Auto store status display
Depending on the setup settings, this appears when the auto store function is
enabled.
260
Still Image Operations
b Display of available image capacity
This shows the remaining number of frames. When no more frames can be
stored, in pair mode “1” or “0” appears in red, and in single mode “0” appears
in red.
c Target FM selection buttons
Ancillary data-attached clip display
Status display
Still/duration display
Reposition/Lock status display
The border color shows the status as follows:
Blue: selected as the reference channel
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel
Black: not selected
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Press one of these to select which of the selected outputs (FM1 and FM2 in the
example shown) the operation applies to.
The following information appears on the button.
Status display
File name (e.g. image001) and thumbnail: when a file is output
Black: when a black signal is output
Through: when the input image is output
Freeze: when a freeze is output
Composite: when a composite image is processed
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)
Still/duration display
When a still image is selected, “Still” is shown. When a clip is selected, a
duration indication such as “00:00:10” is shown.
Reposition/Lock status display
This shows “R” when the reposition function (see page 276) is on, and shows
“L” when the lock function (see page 277) is on.
Still Image Operations
261
Ancillary data-attached clip display
For an ancillary data attached clip, an “A” appears.
d Pair selection button
Select the pair to be displayed in the target FM selection buttons.
(in the following figure, the pair of FM1 and FM2 is selected.)
Status display
The border color shows the status as follows:
Blue: selected as the reference channel
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel
Black: not selected
The following information appears on the button.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Status display
For a pair, shows the status for the reference.
Thumbnail: when a file is output
Black: when a black signal is output
Through: when the input image is output
Freeze: when a freeze is output
Compos: when a composite image is processed
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)
e Pair button
Press this button, turning it on, to enable pair mode.
f File selection area
You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files.
262
Still Image Operations
File information detail display
Selected file.
When a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Thumbnail indications
Still image files and clip files: Still image files are displayed as gray buttons
and clip files are displayed as yellow buttons.
Single files and pair files: Single files are displayed with shadow and pair files
are displayed with no shadow.
Selected file: Pale blue border. When more than one file is selected, only the
first is pale blue, and the remainders are amber. If the pair file was selected,
each press switches the front and the back.
File information detail display
For the selected file, this shows the file name, “P” if a pair file, “A” if an
ancillary data attached clip, and the duration.
g Frame memory folder selection area
Select the frame memory folder to be displayed.
h Direct Recall button
Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail
immediately recalls the file.
Selecting an Input Image
For the input image to frame memory, you can use either the signal selected on
one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal.
Still Image Operations
263
When using the signal on frame memory source bus 1 or 2 for the input image,
select the signal as described below.
For the method of using a color matte signal, see “Freezing an image and
writing it to memory” (page 265).
Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus
As an example, to select a signal on frame memory source bus 1, use the
following procedure.
1
2
Using the bank selection buttons in the auxiliary bus control block, select
the desired bank.
In the auxiliary bus control block, press the AUX delegation button to
which frame memory source bus 1 is allocated, turning it on.
For allocation of buses to the AUX delegation buttons, see “Assigning a
Bus to an AUX Delegation Button” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
3
In the key row of the bank selected in step 1, select the signal to be used
for the input image.
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame memory
The following description applies to the case of settings for FM1&2, but the
procedures are similar for the other cases.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, press one of VF1 to VF4, and select the
required HF menu.
The current status of frame memory appears. (See page 260).
2
From the pair selection buttons, press the buttons corresponding to FM1
and FM2.
This assigns the signals to FM1 and FM2.
To the right of the target FM selection buttons, the FM1 and FM2 output
status appears (see page 261).
3
If required, press [Pair], to select the FM operation mode (pair mode).
On: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) as a pair.
264
Still Image Operations
Off: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) individually.
For more details, see “Pair mode” (page 257).
Note
In the Pair Recombination menu, the [Pair] operation is not possible.
4
Press the target FM selection button [FM1] or [FM2] (see page 261) to
select the FM operations apply to.
When [Pair] is On: Whichever of FM1 and FM2 you press, the pair is
selected.
When [Pair] is Off: One of the targets must be selected. However, in the
Clip >Play menu you can also select both FM1 and FM2.
Selecting a frame memory folder
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area (see page 263).
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum of
12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
Capturing and Saving an Input Image
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
As the input material for the frame memory, you can use the signal selected on
the frame memory source bus. For this signal you can use video processing
(video levels or hue value adjustment) or masking.
Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8, then
carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory
output image, and saves it in temporary memory.
For a freeze, an image can be captured either as video frame (a “frame freeze”)
or a video field (“field freeze”).
Note
When the system is powered off, any freeze images written to temporary
memory are lost.
Freezing an image and writing it to memory
To freeze the signal selected as input material, and write it to memory, use the
following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF2 ‘Freeze/Store.’
Still Image Operations
265
The Freeze/Store menu appears.
2
Select the target frame memory.
For the procedure, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame
memory” (page 264).
3
4
To enable V/K mode, press [V/K Mode] turning it on.
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 265.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Freeze Enable], turning it on.
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, a freeze is now possible.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
6
7
If necessary, make the video process settings (see page 268) or mask
settings (see page 268) for application to the selected signal.
In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.
Frame: Freeze one frame.
Field: Freeze one field.
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.
Notes
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system
is powered off.
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images
266
Still Image Operations
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame
memory selection is changed.
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.
720P/50, 720P/59.94
Saving a freeze image (Store)
You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the
freeze function as a file in memory. You can save a single image in a single file
and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file.
Note
When the system is powered off, all the files saved in memory are erased.
To save a captured still image in a file, use the following procedure in the Still
>Freeze/Store menu.
1
Press [Store].
The keyboard window (see page 85) appears.
2
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum 8 characters).
Note
3
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,
LPT9
In the keyboard window, press the [Enter] button.
This saves the still image file in memory.
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Freezing an image
and writing it to memory.”
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting
appears.
When the system is powered off, the file saved in memory is erased.
To carry out a freeze and store simultaneously (Freeze and Store)
Press [Freeze & Store], turning it on.
In this state, if you press [Frame] or [Field], this carries out a freeze, and
simultaneously stores in a still image file.
Still Image Operations
267
Setting video processing
To set video processing for the signal selected on a frame memory source bus,
use the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.
1
2
In the <Video Process> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Overall gain of the video signal
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Y signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Y signal black level
–7.31 to +109.59
To return the settings to the default values, press [Unity] in the <Video
Process> group.
Note
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
When a pair setting is active, it is coupled to the video process on/off
setting, but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory
source bus 1. The pair setting cannot be used to set the frame memory
source bus 2. If you want to set video process for frame memory source bus
1 only with the pair setting when old settings for frame memory source bus
2 remain, return the frame memory source bus 2 settings to their default
values. When setting video process for the frame memory source bus 2,
disable the pair setting.
Setting a mask
Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2. To apply
a mask to the signal selected on frame memory source bus 1, for example, use
the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.
1
2
268
Press [Box Mask] turning it on.
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
1
Top
Top position
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Left position
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Right position
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Bottom position
–100.00 to +100.00
Still Image Operations
Adjustment
Setting values
3
To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2, press [Mask
Link], turning it on.
Recalling Still Images
You can recall an image file saved in memory, and allocate to any of the FM1
to FM8 outputs.
Recalling a still image
To recall a still image file saved in memory using the thumbnails, and assign it
to an FM output, use the following procedure.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’
The Recall menu appears.
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (pairs of main file and sub file) are
displayed.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Sub file
Main file
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files appear.
Still Image Operations
269
Single file
2
3
4
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See
page 264.)
If [Direct Recall] is on, press and turn it off.
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
5
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
6
7
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Scroll
Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.
Press [Recall].
This recalls the still image file, which is assigned to the FM you selected
in step 2.
To recall in direct recall mode
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.
1
2
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.
This immediately recalls the file.
270
Still Image Operations
To display the subsidiary file in front
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.
Image Processing
You can combine the background image (a still image file allocated to any of
FM1 to FM8, a freeze image written to temporary memory, or a black signal)
and the input signal.
The following types of processing are available.
Pattern key: Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator, you can cut
out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame
memory source bus or a color matte signal. You can adjust the size and
position of the pattern, and add modifiers.
External key: When processing an image in FM1 (3, 5, 7), you can use the
signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the
background image, and fill with the signal selected on the frame memory
source bus 1, or a color matte signal.
When processing an image in FM2 (4, 6, 8), you can use the signal selected
on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image, and
fill with a color matte signal (always white).
Note
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled (see page
257).
MIX: Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory
source bus or color matte signal. The mix ratio can be set.
NAM: Non-additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the
frame memory source bus or color matte signal.
Combining the background image and input signal
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF3 ‘Composite.’
The Composite menu appears.
2
3
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See
page 264.)
To select V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.
Still Image Operations
271
4
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 265.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Edit Enable], turning it on.
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, and the combining of the background signal (the
signal providing the background for combination) and the input signal (the
signal providing the foreground for combination) is now possible.
Note
The input signal is lowered by one line, but when you apply a freeze, the
freeze image is returned to the correct position.
6
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
7
8
9
To use a color matte signal for the input signal, press [Frgd Color], turning
it on.
Even when pair mode is enabled, you can make separate settings for each
FM.
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
If you turned [Frgd Color] off in step 6, if required press [Input Adjust] to
display the Input Adjust menu, and make the video process (see page 268)
and mask (see page 268) settings for the input signal.
To set the background signal to black, press [Bkgd Black], turning it on.
Notes
• When the background signal is originally black, [Bkgd Black] remains
on.
272
Still Image Operations
• When the background signal is a freeze image (an image frozen, but not
saved), turning [Bkgd Black] on erases the unsaved freeze image and, as
a result, [Bkgd Black] remains on.
10In the <Type> group, set the type of combination (see page 274).
11In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.
Frame: Freeze one frame.
Field: Freeze one field.
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.
Notes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system
is powered off.
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame
memory selection is changed.
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.
720P/50, 720P/59.94
Saving a processed freeze image
To save a processed freeze image as a file, in the Still >Composite menu use
the following procedure.
1
Press [Store].
The keyboard window appears.
2
3
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum eight characters).
In the keyboard window press [Enter].
This saves the freeze image as a still image file in memory.
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Combining the
background image and input signal” (page 271).
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting
appears.
Still Image Operations
273
Selecting the way in which images are combined
To select the way in which the background image and input signal are
combined (see page 271), use the following procedure.
1
In the <Type> group of the Still >Composite menu, select one of the
following methods of combination.
• Pattern Key: pattern key
• Ext Key: external key
(This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled. The signal
selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal.)
• Mix: mix
• Nam: non-additive mix
If none of the above is selected, image combination is not carried out.
2
Depending on the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.
• When [Pattern Key] is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Size of pattern
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness of pattern
0.00 to 100.00
3
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The patterns are the same as for a wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1)
(page 362).
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• When [Ext Key] is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Clip
Reference level for key
signal generation
+109.59 to –7.31
2
Gain
Key sensitivity
–100.00 to +100.00
• When [Mix] is selected
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Mix Rate
Mix proportion
0.00 to 100.00
When you selected a pattern key, press [Pattern Adjust].
The Pattern Adjust menu appears. In the menu, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
274
Still Image Operations
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 207.
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of
pattern horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of
pattern vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
a) See page 211.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• When turning [Rotation Angle] on and inclining the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
To select the pattern, display the Pattern Select menu by pressing [Pattern
Select] in the Pattern Adjust menu. You can change the pattern selected in
step 2 here. After selecting one of the patterns (wipe patterns 1 to 24)
displayed in the Pattern Select menu, you can adjust the following
parameters.
4
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
When you selected a pattern key or external key, if required press [Key
Invert] in the Still >Composite menu to invert the key.
Still Image Operations
275
Image Output
There are two functions related to image output: the reposition function for
moving the output image, and the lock function for fixing the output image.
Moving the output image (reposition function)
For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 (one from FM1, FM3, FM5 and FM7
and the other from FM2, FM4, FM6 and FM8), you can move the output image
with respect to the screen. The area of the screen around the image that has
been moved is filled with black. There are two ways of carrying out this
repositioning.
Normal mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in two-pixel
increments.
Black and white mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in one-pixel
increments, and for each pixel moved the color is inverted.
Note
It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly
to frame memory.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF1
‘Reposition.’
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
The Reposition menu appears. In this menu, you can also enable the V/K
mode (see page 266).
2
3
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output (see page 264).
In the <Reposition> group, select the movement mode.
Normal: Move in normal mode.
Black&White: Move in black & white mode.
4
With the knobs, adjust the parameters to move the image.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
1
Position H
Move in horizontal direction –200.00 to +200.00 a)
Setting values
2
Position V
Move in vertical direction
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
The surroundings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black.
276
Still Image Operations
5
To return the image moved by the reposition function to the center
position, in the <Reposition> group press [Center].
Fixing the output image selection (lock function)
For the output of each of FM1 to FM8, this fixes the image at the current
output. When this lock is enabled, even if the output is recalled in a snapshot
or keyframe, the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF2
‘Lock.’
The Lock menu appears.
2
3
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output. (See page 264.)
Press [Lock], turning it on.
This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image.
To release the lock, set [Lock] to off.
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record)
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
You can continuously capture (freeze) a sequence of input video frames and
store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval.
The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string
followed by a second string.
First character string: A common part of name assigned to all the still images
captured in one record operation. This string includes a maximum of four
characters, which can be specified using a menu before carrying out the
capture. The first string is automatically used as the clip name when the
images are treated as a frame memory clip.
Second character string: A four-digit number (0000 or greater), which is
incremented each time a still image is captured.
Note
When using the record function to continuously capture frames, it is not
possible to use the mask function.
Continuously freezing input images and writing to memory
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF4 ‘Animation
Record.’
Still Image Operations
277
The Animation Record menu appears.
2
Select the desired frame memory.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and
target frame memory” (page 264).
3
4
To use V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the
folder to hold the freeze image.
For details of the selection method, see page 265.
Note
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze
image.
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following
step 5.
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.
5
Press [Record Enable], turning it on.
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair
of FMs selected in step 2, the recording function is now possible.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
6
Input the file name if required.
Pressing [File Name] displays the keyboard window and you can enter the
first character string (up to four characters) of the file name.
7
Set the recording time if required.
Pressing [Duration] displays the numeric keypad window, in which you
can enter the recording time in the form of timecode.
If you set the recording time to zero, this uses all frame memory in which
storing is possible for recording.
8
If required, set video processing for the selected signal.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Setting video processing”
(page 268).
9
Press [Record], to start recording.
When the recording time is set, recording stops once the time has elapsed.
10Press [Stop] to stop recording.
278
Still Image Operations
Even if the recording time is set, you can still stop recording before the set
time has elapsed.
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images
(Animation)
You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function
as keyframes to create an effect. By executing this effect you can recall the
continuous sequence (animation).
Notes
• For example, to create an effect using FM1, FM1 must be assigned to a user
region.
• To execute the effect, you must assign the user region to which FM1 is
assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block.
(For details of assigning to region selection buttons, see Chapter 19
“Control Panel Setup (Panel)” (Volume 3).)
In the Frame Memory menu, effect creation follows the image file names. Of
the eight characters in the file names, if files have the same characters except
for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group, and the
effect is created with the last three (numeric) characters in sequence.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
When creating the effect in pair mode (see page 257), the files used must be
main files and sub files with the same last three (numeric) characters in the file
name.
To recall a continuous sequence of still images, create an effect in the user
region with the still image files as a keyframe, and run the created effect.
Note
With the 720P format, you can continuously recall images using the frame
memory in units of two frames only.
Creating an effect with still image files as a keyframe
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF5 ‘Create Key
Frame.’
The Create Key Frame menu appears.
Still Image Operations
279
• A thumbnail appears for each group of files having the same characters,
except for the last three characters, in the file name.
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (each pair comprising a main file and
a sub file) appear.
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files all appear.
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the frame memory to be
assigned.
This creates the effect in the user region to which the selected frame
memory is assigned.
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and
target frame memory” (page 264).
3
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
4
Turn the knob to select the register number in the user region.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
5
Register
Effect register number
1 to 99
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
To search for an empty register in the user region, use the numeric keypad
control block (see step 3 of “Recalling a Register” in Chapter 13
(Volume 2)).
5
6
7
280
Use the arrow keys or turn the knobs to scroll the thumbnail display of the
files.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Scroll
Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
Select the thumbnail of the files to be used for the keyframe.
If necessary, turn the knob to check the animation effect in the thumbnail
display.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
3
Viewer
Animate thumbnail display 00:00:00 and upwards
of files
Still Image Operations
Setting values
8
9
Using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block,
select one of the regions (User1 to User8) to which the frame memory
output signals have been assigned.
Carry out either of the following.
• To clear the effect register selected in step 4, and create a new effect:
press [Create Key Frame].
• To add to the end of the effect register selected in step 4, press [Append
Key Frame].
A confirmation message for creating the effect appears.
If there is an inappropriate condition for creating the effect, an error
message appears.
For details of error messages, see “Error Messages” in the Appendix
(Volume 3).
10Press [OK].
This creates the effect in the selected user region register.
To cancel creating the effect
Press [Cancel].
Notes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• The effect is built with the selected files, in increasing order of the last three
characters of the file name. If you do not want to include some of these files
in the effect, first delete or rename them.
• A maximum of 99 keyframes can be included in a single effect.
Recalling a sequence of still images
Run the effect created by the foregoing procedure.
The procedure for doing this is the same as for any other effect.
For details, see “Executing Effects” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).
Still Image Operations
281
Frame Memory Clip Function
What is a “frame memory clip”?
Movies can be read into frame memory, and recalled and played back. A movie
held in frame memory is called a “frame memory clip.”
A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters. (For details of
frame memory clip names, see “Continuously Capturing Still Images
(Record)” (page 277).)
Ancillary data
In a frame memory clip, in addition to the video image, you can also record and
play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio.
To record the ancillary data, in the Setup menu the frame memory saving mode
must be set to “save with ancillary data” (see “Saving a Frame Memory Clip
With Ancillary Data” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3)).
Notes
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
• With this setting, the saving mode for still images also changes to “save with
ancillary data,” but when playing back a still image the ancillary data is never
played.
• When you change the saving mode, the frame memory is initialized, and any
existing recorded frame memory data is lost.
Note on transferring ancillary data
Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save
with ancillary data,” and can be saved to an external storage device such as a
hard disk or memory card, and recalled. However, the ancillary data can only
be saved or recalled;
• When the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data.
• When ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled frame memory file.
• When the system signal format is the same as the signal format in the file.
When the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” the
following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip.
• Disable(d):
In this state the ancillary data is not played. This is the status when the
[Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu is set to Off.
• Enable(d):
In this state, ancillary data is present, and can be played back. This is the
status when the [Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu
is set to On. This is the status after a clip recording operation.
282
Frame Memory Clip Function
This status information is saved in a file, and is followed when the file is
recalled.
Frame memory clip settings
For frame memory clips, you can make the following settings using a menu or
device control block (trackball/search dial/joystick).
• Start point
• Stop point
• Loop On/Off
The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes,
and recalled.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Frame Memory Clip Function
283
Frame Memory Clip Operations
For an overview of frame memory clip concepts, see “Frame Memory Clip
Function” (page 282).
Note
During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 286), frame memory operations may not
be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip
playback.
Preparations for Operation
The preparations for using a frame memory clip (hereafter, a “clip”) are the
same as for a still image operation. See “Preparations” (page 259) and
“Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory” (page 264).
Recalling Clips
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Recalling a clip
You can recall a clip from each of frame memories 1 to 8.
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’
The Recall menu appears. (See following figure)
• When [Pair] is set to On, only pair files (sets of main file and sub file)
are shown.
• When [Pair] is set to Off, both of single files and pair files are shown.
284
Frame Memory Clip Operations
Target selection buttons
Frame memory
selection area
Frame memory folder
selection area
Pair selection buttons
Clip file selection area
3
4
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
Direct Recall button
In the frame memory selection area, select an assigned target FM. (See
page 264)
If [Direct Recall] is on, press the button, turning it off.
In the folder selection area, select the desired folder.
By pressing [More] to switch the displays, you can select from a maximum
of 12 folders.
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.
5
6
7
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Scroll
Thumbnail display
scrolling
1 and upwards
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.
Press [Recall].
Frame Memory Clip Operations
285
This recalls the clip file, which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2.
In pair mode, if a clip is selected, the main file is output to FM1, and the
sub file to FM2. In single mode, when only one of FM1 and FM2 is
selected, the front file on the thumbnail is output.
To recall in direct recall mode
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.
1
2
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.
This immediately recalls the file.
To display the subsidiary file in front
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.
Clip Playback
You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control
block.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
With a pair file recalled, it is possible to set [Pair] to Off and carry out a single
file operation, but if you then set [Pair] to On again, the output of frame
memory may be black. In such cases it is necessary to recall the pair file once
more.
Playing a clip using the menu
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF2 ‘Play.’
The Play menu appears. The status of the clip shown in the current target
FM selection buttons appears here.
286
Frame Memory Clip Operations
Current position
(red bar)
Playback start point
(pale blue bar)
Playback end point
(yellow bar)
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
2
3
4
Status buttons
These show the timecode values for
the start point, current position, and
end point.
When [Pair] is Off, press a target FM selection button to select the target.
To set loop playback, press [Loop], turning it on.
To start playback, press [Play]. During playback, to stop, press [Stop].
To cue up
Press [Cue].
To play the image at the beginning of the clip (Clip Begin)
Press [Rewind].
To play the image at the end of the clip (Clip End)
Press [FF].
Frame Memory Clip Operations
287
To specify the playback start point
To set the current position as the playback start point, in the <Start TC> group,
press [Set]. To set a different position, press the [Start] status button, and enter
a timecode value from the numeric keypad window.
To specify the playback stop point
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop
playback, then in the <Stop TC> group, press [Set]. To set to any position,
press the [Stop] status button, and enter a timecode value from the numeric
keypad window.
To change the current position
To change the current position, press the [Current] status button, and enter a
timecode value from the numeric keypad window.
Using the device control block (MKS-8036A Search Dial Module,
option) to play back clips
Note
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.
1
With the device selection buttons, select the frame memory clip to be
played (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.
2
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.
For details of the buttons in the device control block (MKS-8036A search
dial module, option), see “Device Control Block (MKS-8036A Search Dial
Module, Option)” (page 61) in Chapter 2.
To specify the playback start point
To make the current position the playback start point, press the [START TC]
button. To set a different position, press the [SET START TC] button, then
enter the timecode from the numeric keypad control block.
To specify the duration
Press the [SET DUR] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad
control block. If the playback start point is already set, this automatically sets
the playback stop point. If the playback stop point is already set, this
automatically sets the playback start point. (The duration setting is not
displayed in the device control block.)
288
Frame Memory Clip Operations
To specify the playback stop point
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop
playback, then press the [STOP TC] button. To set to any position, press the
[SET STOP TC] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad control
block.
To carry out the variable speed playback
Use the search dial.
For details on using the search dial, see “Controlling the Tape/Disk
Transport” in Chapter 12 (Volume 2).
To apply a loop to a frame memory clip
Press the [LOOP] button.
Using the device control block (MKS-8031TB trackball module,
option) to play back clips
Note
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.
1
Press the [DEV] button in the region selection buttons, and select the frame
memory clip for playback (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).
2
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.
For details of the buttons in the device control block (MKS-8031TB trackball
module, option), see “Device Control Block (MKS-8031TB Trackball Module,
Option)” (page 58) in Chapter 2.
For details of the playback start point, stop point, and duration settings, see the
previous item, “Using the device control block (MKS-8036A Search Dial
Module, option) to play back clips” (page 288).
To carry out the variable speed playback
Press any of the [SHTL], [JOG], and [VAR] buttons, then turn the Z-ring or
move the joystick. The image changes in the forward direction when you turn
the Z-ring clockwise, and in the reverse direction when you turn it
counterclockwise. Move the joystick to the right for the forward direction and
to the left for the reverse direction.
Frame Memory Clip Operations
289
When you pressed the [JOG] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the turning speed of the Z-ring or the movement speed of the joystick.
When you pressed the [SHTL] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick.
When you pressed the [VAR] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick,
in the range –1 to +3 times normal speed.
Clip Creation
You save a movie as a clip.
Note
If the number of frame memory clips exceed 100 single files (50 pair files), an
error appears.
Using the menu to record clips
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF3 ‘Record.’
The Record menu appears.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
290
Frame Memory Clip Operations
Frame memory
selection area
2
4
5
Folder selection
area
With [Pair] off, press the operation target selection button, to select the
operation target.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
Operation target
selection buttons
Pair selection
buttons
In the folder selection area, select the folder containing the clip to be
recorded.
Press [Record Enable], turning it on.
To set the clip name, press [Name].
A keyboard window appears.
6
7
8
Enter the clip name, and press Enter.
To start recording, press [Record Start].
To end recording, press [Record Stop].
To set the clip duration
1
Press [Clip Duration].
A numeric keypad window appears.
Frame Memory Clip Operations
291
2
Enter a timecode value or number of frames, and press Enter.
This confirms the clip duration.
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders
You can create, rename, and delete frame memory folders.
Creating a new folder
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF5 ‘Folder.’
The Folder menu appears. The status area shows a list of the current folder
settings.
2
Select [New].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter the folder name, and press Enter.
This confirms the folder name.
Changing the folder name
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
1
2
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys
or by turning the knobs.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
No.
Folder selection
1 to 12
2
Num
Number of files to select
consecutively from selected file
1 to 12
Press [Rename].
A keyboard window appears.
3
Enter the new folder name, and press Enter.
Note
The following names cannot be used for folders:
Default, Flash1, Flash2
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
292
Frame Memory Clip Operations
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,
LPT9
This changes the folder name.
Deleting a folder
1
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys
or by turning the knobs.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
No.
Folder selection
1 to 12
2
Num
Number of files to select
consecutively from selected file
1 to 12
To select all folders, select [All].
2
Press [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
3
To carry out the deletion select [Yes], and to cancel the deletion select
[No].
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Note
It is not possible to delete the default folder (named “Default”).
Clip Output
As for still image operation, you can use the reposition and lock functions.
For details of the operation, see “Image Output” (page 276).
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data
Preparations
To record ancillary data, it is first necessary in the Setup menu to select “save
with ancillary data” as the frame memory saving mode (see “Saving a Frame
Memory Clip With Ancillary Data” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).)
Frame Memory Clip Operations
293
Recording ancillary data
To record ancillary data in a frame memory clip, use the Frame Memory >Clip
>Record menu.
For details of the operating sequence, see “Clip Creation” (page 290).
To check ancillary data during recording
If the ancillary data to be recorded is embedded audio, by first setting the signal
output to through mode, you can listen while recording.
For the method of setting the signal output to through mode, see “Signal
Output Settings (Output Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
Note
For [Freeze Enable] or [Record Enable], in the <Record Enable> group,
pressing [Clip] or [Ext Clip] to turn them on or off may result in noise. Also,
with these buttons in the On state, selecting the signal on the frame memory
source bus may result in noise.
Playing back ancillary data
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
You can play ancillary data recorded in a frame memory clip by normal
playback or an auto transition of the clip transition.
To play the ancillary data, you must use the following procedure to enable
playback of the ancillary data. For the subsequent playback operation, see
“Clip Playback” (page 286).
Notes
• After recording a frame memory clip, the ancillary data state is enabled for
playback.
• To play back the clip, set the signal output to through mode. For the method
of setting through mode, see “Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)” in
Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
• When the reposition function is on, ancillary data cannot be played back.
• Switching reposition function between on and off may cause noise.
• Only the AUX bus and edit preview bus can output ancillary data.
• For loop playback of clips in the following video formats, the loop playback
range must be at least 5 frames, and set to a multiple of 5 frames.
– 480/59.94i
– 720/59.94P
– 1080/59.94i
• Recalling operations of still images or clips can cause noise.
• Carrying out file operations on a frame memory clip may result in the
ancillary data being discontinuous, or in noise occurring. However, if the
first or last frame of the clip is deleted, noise will not occur.
• The audio sampling frequency is always 48 kHz.
294
Frame Memory Clip Operations
• In the case of 480i or 59.94, noise may occur at the beginning of playing back
a clip. This can be avoided by making the first nine or more frames of the clip
soundless.
• When you play back the recorded embedded audio, depending on the device
to be used, noises are produced at the playback start point and end point. For
details of devices that are used for playback, contact your Sony service or
sales representative.
1
2
3
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 “Clip”, HF5 “Ancillary Enable.”
Select the frame memory folder and file to be played back.
Set the [Ancillary Enable] button to On.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Frame Memory Clip Operations
295
Clip Transition Operations
A frame memory clip (movie) is played back, linked to a transition using a mix
(dissolve) or wipe.
The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition.
• Key frame capture is not possible.
• It is not possible to apply a pattern limit.
• Transitions executed in two strokes, such as a preset color mix with the
stroke mode set to Normal, or a DME wipe with a picture-in-picture pattern,
will not execute correctly.
• It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition.
• Transition preview cannot be used.
• No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot.
• When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during executing
another clip transition, the follow-on transition does not operate properly. Be
sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot.
Note
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, if one of the wipe
direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit, it indicates the
direction of clip playback.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Setting a clip transition
The following example describes the case of a clip transition using FM 1&2
Clip on the M/E-1 bank.
Note
To use a clip transition effectively, the image from the frame memory clip
being played back during the clip transition should be seen in the M/E-1
program output. For example, inserting a key using frame memory output 1 and
frame memory output 2.
1
2
Display the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu, and in the <Transition Type>
group select “FM1&2 Clip.”
Press [Clip Transition].
The Clip Transition menu appears.
296
Clip Transition Operations
Background transition display area
Clip transition display area
Clip display area
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
3
Press the [Clip] button.
The Clip menu appears, and the status area shows a list of clips.
4
5
Select the clip to use in the clip transition.
Return to the Clip Transition menu, and in the <BKGD Transition Type>
group, select the background transition type.
Note
For details of the background transition selected here, see the various
adjustments in the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu.
6
7
In the <Select> group, press [BKGD Transition].
Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start
point independently of the clip playback timing.
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD
Transition Set Timing> group press [Start].
Clip Transition Operations
297
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)
Position of frame 0
8
Reference axis
Using either of the following methods, set the end point of the background
transition.
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD
Transition Set Timing> group press [Stop].
• Turn knob 2 to set the number of frames.
9
If Wipe or DME Wipe is selected in the <BKGD Transition Type> group,
in the <BKGD Transition Direction> group, select the background
transition direction.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
10In the <Select> group, press [FM 1&2 Clip].
11Using either of the following methods, set the start point of the clip.
• Move the fader lever to the desired start point, and in the <Clip
Transition SetTiming> group press [Start].
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)
Note
It is not possible to set the end point.
12In the <Clip Transition Direction> group, select the playback direction of
the clip.
To reset the start point and end point
Press [Timing Reset].
The background transition start point and end point, and the clip start point are
all reset.
298
Clip Transition Operations
Image Data Management
You can carry out the following operations on the files in which images are
saved.
• Pair file processing
• Move
• Delete
• Rename
Note
During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 286), frame memory operations may not
be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip
playback.
Pair File Processing
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
You can create a pair file from two single files. In the reverse direction, you
can split a pair file into two single files.
Couple: You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files.
Separate: You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or
clip files.
Creating a pair file from two single files
Note
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to On.
The following description applies to the case of FM1&2, but the procedures are
similar for the other cases.
1
2
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip
>Recall menu, recall the two single files you want to convert to a pair file,
to FM1 and FM2.
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF1 ‘Pair
Recombination.’
The Pair Recombination menu appears.
Image Data Management
299
3
Press [Couple].
This converts the files output to FM1 and FM2 to a pair.
Splitting a pair file into two single files
Note
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to Off.
The following description applies to the case of FM1and FM2, but the
procedures are similar for the other cases.
1
2
3
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip
>Recall menu, recall the pair file.
Select the folder in which the file to be moved is stored.
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF1 ‘Pair
Recombination.’
The Pair Recombination menu appears.
4
Press [Separate].
The FM1 and FM2 pair file is split into separate single files.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Moving Files
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Move.’
The Move menu appears. The status area shows files to be moved in the
upper area, and destination files in the lower area.
2
3
Select the folder which contains the file to be moved.
Using any of the following methods, select the file to be moved.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
300
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
No
File selection
1 and upwards
2
Num
Selection of number of files in
sequence
1 and upwards
Image Data Management
4
5
6
Select the destination folder and file.
Press [Move].
To confirm the move press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].
Deleting Files
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Delete.’
The Delete menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.
2
3
Select the folder which contains the file to be deleted.
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be deleted. If
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
No
File selection
1 and upwards
2
Num
Selection of number of files in
sequence
1 and upwards
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Knob
• To delete all files, press [Select All], turning it on.
• When a clip thumbnail is selected, the still image files making up the clip
are also selected for deletion.
4
5
If necessary, turn the knob to check the contents of the frame memory clip
through the thumbnail display.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
3
Viewer
For a movie, the current frame
00:00:00 and
position. For a still image, no effect. upwards
Setting values
Press [Delete].
A message for confirming the deletion appears.
6
To confirm the deletion press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].
Image Data Management
301
Renaming Files
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF6 ‘Rename’
The Rename menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.
2
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be renamed. If
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.
• Turn the knobs.
3
4
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
No
File selection
1 and upwards
If necessary, turn the knob check the contents of the frame memory clip
through the thumbnail display.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Viewer
For a movie, the current frame
position. For a still image, no
effect.
00:00:00 and
upwards
Press [Rename].
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
A keyboard window appears.
5
Enter the new name, then press [Enter] in the keyboard window.
Note
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
This renames the file.
302
Image Data Management
External Hard Disk Drive Access
You can connect a hard disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher
processor, to carry out the following operations.
Format: Format the hard disk.
Backup: Batch saving of files from frame memory to the hard disk.
Restore: Restoring frame memory from files saved on the hard disk.
Since image data saved in memory is lost when the system is powered off,
using an external hard disk drive allows required data to be preserved.
Notes
• Only one hard disk drive can be connected to a single switcher processor.
• While the hard disk is being accessed, frame memory operations are not
possible.
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the
target FM selection buttons (see page 286), frame memory operations may
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after
stopping clip playback.
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
Consult your Sony service representative or sales representative about the
hard disk drives that can be connected.
Hard Disk Formatting
When you connect a hard disk drive for the first time, it is necessary to format
the hard disk. This partitions the disk, creating five logical drives (FMHDD1
to FMHDD5).
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF1
‘Format.’
The Format menu appears.
To get the hard disk drive information
In the button area press [Refresh Status].
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk
drive.
2
Press [Format].
External Hard Disk Drive Access
303
A popup window for confirming formatting appears.
Note
Carrying out formatting erases any existing data on the hard disk.
3
Press [Yes].
This starts the hard disk formatting. A progress bar and numerical
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Success!!”
appears.
4
Press [OK].
Saving Files
You can save all of the files from frame memory to the external hard disk drive.
Note
Before carrying out this operation for the first time, it is necessary to format the
hard disk (see previous item, “Hard Disk Formatting”).
1
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF2
‘Backup/Restore.’
The Backup/Restore menu appears.
If in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher to operate.
To get the hard disk drive information
Press [Refresh Status].
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk
drive, and the names of directories within the logical drives.
2
Using any of the following methods, select a logical drive (FMHDD1 to
FMHDD5).
• Press directly on the list to select.
• Press a button in the <Partition> group.
• Turn the knob.
3
304
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Partition
Logical drive selection
1 to 5
Press [Backup].
External Hard Disk Drive Access
A popup window for confirming file saving appears.
Note
When you save the files, all of the saved files in the logical drive is erased
immediately before the saving operations.
4
Press [Yes].
This starts the file saving operation. If there is no directory in the logical
drive, a directory is automatically created, and the files are saved within it.
A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the
operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”
appears.
5
Press [OK].
To rename a directory
Select a directory in the list, and in the button area press [Rename].
In the keyboard window that appears, enter the new directory name, and press
[Enter]. The name of a directory is limited to eight characters.
Note
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
The following names cannot be used:
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9
Recalling Files
You can recall all of the saved files on the hard disk drive into frame memory.
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the procedure “Saving Files” (page 304).
Note
It is not possible to select a directory (logical drive) on which files are not
saved.
2
Press [Restore].
A popup window for confirming file recall appears.
External Hard Disk Drive Access
305
Note
When you recall the files, any existing data in frame memory is lost
immediately before the recalling operations.
3
Press [Yes].
This starts the file recall operation. A progress bar and numerical
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”
appears.
4
Press [OK].
Chapter 7 Frame Memory
306
External Hard Disk Drive Access
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds,
Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Color Background ....................................................................................308
Color Background Settings Menu .....................................................308
Basic Color Background Setting Operations .....................................308
Copy and Swap .........................................................................................312
Copy and Swap Operations .....................................................................316
Copy and Swap Menu Operations .....................................................316
Copy by Button Operation ................................................................317
Misc Menu Operations .............................................................................318
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ..........................318
Editing Keyboard Settings .................................................................319
Safe Title Settings .............................................................................320
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings .....321
AUX Menu Operations ............................................................................323
AUX Bus Settings .............................................................................323
Status Menu ..............................................................................................324
Router Control Menu Operations ...........................................................325
Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination .............................325
Switching the Source for Each Destination .......................................326
Video Process ............................................................................................327
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .....................327
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus ...............................327
Video Process Memory .....................................................................328
Video Process Settings ..............................................................................329
Color Background
The dedicated generators generate color signals, and you can use these as color
backgrounds in video effects. You use the color signals by assigning them to
cross-point buttons.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Color combinations (“color mix”)
The color generators can output the result of combining two colors, which are
color 1 and color 2.
Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator, color 1 and color 2 can be
combined in the boundary region, forming a color gradation. This is referred to
in the menu system as “color mix.”
You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern.
When the “color mix” function is not used, the result is a flat color, and color
1 is always output.
You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu. This section
describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example.
Color Background Settings Menu
Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu
Use either of the following operations.
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [COLOR
BKGD], and press VF1 ‘Color Bkgd1.’
• Press a cross-point button assigned to color background 1 twice in rapid
succession.
The above operation displays the Color Bkgd1 menu.
Basic Color Background Setting Operations
Making a single-color matte (Flat Color)
If you are not using the “color mix” function to combine two colors, use the
following procedure.
1
308
Color Background
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd 1 menu, press [Flat Color], turning
it on.
You can now adjust color 1.
2
Set the following parameters.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Knob
Making a color combination (color mix)
To combine color 1 and color 2, use the following procedure.
1
2
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd1 menu, press [Mix Color], turning
it on.
Set the following parameters as required.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Degree of softening of edge
0.00 to 100.00
5
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24 a)
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” (page 362).
You can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the [Mix Ptn
Select] button, to display the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern
appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24), and
you can then adjust the following parameters.
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Edge softness
0.00 to 100.00
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,
then adjust the parameters.
Knob
4
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
If required, set the pattern modifiers.
Color Background
309
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See page 207.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
• When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
a) See page 211.
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
Aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 210.
• When turning [Pairing] on and making a wipe pattern like a
Venetian blind
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Width
Width of the slits
1 to 128 (integer)
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the
pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 208.
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a constant rate
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See page 209.
310
Color Background
• When selecting H (horizontal) or V (vertical) in the <Modulation>
group and applying waviness to the pattern
(The modulation is always a sine wave.)
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Amplitude
Amplitude of modulation
0.00 to 100.00
2
Frequency
Frequency of modulation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Speed
Speed of waves
–100.00 to +100.00
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
5
Knob
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning
it on.
Color Background
311
Copy and Swap
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
You can copy and swap the settings among the M/E-1 and PGM/PST banks or
between keyers.
The following settings can be copied or swapped.
• Overall settings for the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks
• Keyer settings
• Wipe settings in a transition control block
• Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• DME wipe settings in a transition control block
• DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block
• Matte data (color 1, color 2, and how to compose them)
• Color settings
• DME channel settings
• Format converter input settings (copy only)
• Format converter output settings (copy only)
You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation. Swap
operations, and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu
operation.
M/E copy and M/E swap
You can copy and swap the overall bank settings between the M/E-1 and PGM/
PST banks.
Target bank
Target data
M/E-1
PGM/PST
Bank settings excluding the following data items:
• Setup data
• Snapshots
• Keyframe effects
• Key snapshots
• Key memory
Note
If a DME is being used on the source M/E bank, then if for example there are
insufficient DME channels, it may not be possible to select the DME.
There are no such restrictions on a swap.
Keyer copy and keyer swap
You can carry out copy and swap operations among the keyers listed in the
following table.
312
Copy and Swap
Target bank
Target keyer
Target data
M/E-1
Keys 1 to 4
PGM/PST
Downstream keys 1 to 4
Key settings excluding the following data
items:
• Setup data
• Key snapshots
• Key memory
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Note
If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a
swap, then if for example there are insufficient DME channels, or the limit on
using DME channels within an M/E bank is exceeded, it may not be possible
to select the DME.
Wipe copy and wipe swap
You can copy and swap the wipe settings between the banks.
Target bank
Target data
M/E-1
PGM/PST
Wipe settings.
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving
independent key transition wipe settings.
Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition
control block
You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the keyers listed in the
following table.
Target bank
Target keyer
Target data
M/E-1
Keys 1 to 4
PGM/PST
Downstream keys 1 to 4
Wipe settings in the independent key
transition control block.
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings between the banks listed in the
following table.
Target bank
Target data
M/E-1
PGM/PST
DME wipe settings.
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving
independent key transition DME wipe settings.
Copy and Swap
313
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key
transition control block
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the keyers listed in the
following table.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Target bank
Target keyer
Target data
M/E-1
Keys 1 to 4
PGM/PST
Downstream keys 1 to 4
DME wipe settings in the independent
key transition control block.
Matte data copy and swap
You can copy or swap the matte data among the color generators listed in the
following table.
Target bank
Target keyer and data
M/E-1
PGM/PST
• Keys 1 to 4
• Downstream keys 1 to 4
Color background
• Matte data for color background 1
• Matte data for key fill
• Matte data for key edge fill
Matte data for wipe border edge
Color data copy and swap
You can copy or swap the color data among the color generators listed in the
following table.
Target bank
Target keyer and data
M/E-1
PGM/PST
• Keys 1 to 4
• Downstream keys 1 to 4
• Colors 1 and 2 for key fill
• Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill
• “Zabton” color data
Matte data for wipe border
Color background
• Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1
Frame memory
• FM1 color
• FM2 color
DME ch1, ch2
DME ch4 to ch8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Background
Border
Sepia
Light
Shade
Drop shadow
Trail
DME channel copy and swap
You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 2.
314
Copy and Swap
Copying format converter data
You can copy data from one format converter input to another or from one
output to another.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Copy and Swap
315
Copy and Swap Operations
Copy and Swap Menu Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Accessing the Copy/Swap menu
In the menu operation section top menu selection buttons, press the [Copy/
Swap] button, then press VF1 ‘Copy/Swap.’ The Copy/Swap menu appears.
Here a copy/swap operation on wipe data is described by way of example,
using the Copy/Swap >Wipe menu, but the same general procedure applies to
all of the following menus.
• M/E: Copying and swapping M/E data
• Key: Copying and swapping key data
• Wipe: Copying and swapping wipe data
• DME Wipe: Copying and swapping DME wipe data
• Matte: Copying and swapping matte data
• Color: Copying and swapping color data
• DME: Copying and swapping data by DME channels
• Format Converter: Copying format converter data
For details, see “Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)” in Chapter
20 (Volume 3).
For an overview of the concepts involved, see “Copy and Swap” (page 312).
For details of color corrector copy and swap, see Chapter 9 “Color
Corrector” (page 331).
Copying and swapping wipe data
As an example, to copy or swap wipe data, use the following procedure.
1
In the Copy/Swap menu, select HF3 ‘Wipe.’
The Copy/Swap >Wipe menu appears.
The status area shows lists for the copy/swap source on the left, and the
copy/swap destination on the right.
2
In the <Data Select> group, select either of the following.
Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the transition control block.
Key Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the independent key
transition control block.
316
Copy and Swap Operations
3
Using any of the following methods, select the data to be copied or
swapped.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Left No
Select data for copy/
swap source
1 to 4 a)
1 to 16 b)
2
Right No
Select data for copy/
swap destination
1 to 4 a)
1 to 16 b)
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Knob
a) Transition control block wipe data
b) Independent key transition control block wipe data
For details of the data affected, see “Copy and Swap” (page 312).
4
To copy, press [Copy], and to swap, press [Swap].
This carries out the copy or swap.
To undo a copy or swap
Press [Undo], to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out.
Copy by Button Operation
You can copy key data by a simple button operation.
Basic button operation
The basic button operation is to hold down the copy source button, then press
the destination button.
You can undo the last operation using [Undo] in the menu (see page 317).
Keyer copy button operation
Use the key delegation buttons in the respective banks.
To copy from M/E-1 key 1 to P/P downstream key 2
Hold down the M/E-1 key delegation button [KEY1] and press the P/P key
delegation button [DSK2].
Copy and Swap Operations
317
Misc Menu Operations
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
In the Misc menu, you can carry out the following operations.
• Enabling and disabling operation from an external device, System Manager,
or an editing keyboard.
• Enabling and disabling side flags on the background bus of each of the M/E1 and PGM/PST banks.
For the side flag function, see “Side Flags” (page 352).
• Switching the safe title function on or off for each switcher output.
• Displaying the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and fade-toblack transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and changing
the settings.
Port Settings for Control From an External Device
Enabling or disabling control from an external device
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears with the status area
showing the settings of the following ports.
• Switcher Remote 1 to Remote 2 ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)
• Switcher GPI port (parallel, 25-pin)
• DME1/DME2 Editor ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)
• DME1/DME2 GPI ports (parallel, 25-pin)
2
In the <Switcher> or <DME> group, press on the name of the port for
which you want to disable control from an external device, turning it off.
To re-enable control for the port, press on its name once more.
Notes
• It is not necessary to make any settings for DME2.
• For the AUX bus operation from the Remote1 to Remote2 ports of the
switcher, the setting (Enable/Disable/Manual) in the Setup menu takes
precedence. Only when the setting is “Manual,” the settings made in the
Port Enable menu apply.
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface
Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
318
Misc Menu Operations
DME override
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.
2
In the <DME Override> group, select the DME override mode.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
DME Override: When a switcher snapshot or effect using a DME is
recalled, forcibly select the DME that was used when saving.
On Air Protect: The operation is the same as the DME override function,
except that a DME being used by an M/E bank or P/P bank that is on
air will not be forcibly selected.
Note
If effects using the same DME channel are selected simultaneously in two
or more regions, the DME is selected with the order of precedence P/P >M/
E1 >M/E2 >M/E3.
Enabling or disabling control from System Manager
By installing the BZPS-8000 System Management Software (System
Manager), you can use a computer connected on a network for management of
some switcher data and control operations.
To enable or disable this function, use the following procedure.
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.
2
Press [System Manager].
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.
Editing Keyboard Settings
Note
The following operations are only possible when a license for the BZS-8050
Editing Control Software is activated. For details of license registration, see
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 18
(Volume 3).
Misc Menu Operations
319
Enabling or disabling control from the editing keyboard
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF2 ‘Plug-In Editor.’
The Misc >Enable >Plug-In Editor menu appears.
2
In the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group, press [Editor Enable].
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.
To enable control of the preview bus only
When control from the editing keyboard is disabled (when [Editor Enable] is
set to Disable), to enable control of the preview bus only, press [PVW Bus
Enable] in the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group.
Safe Title Settings
Switching the safe title function on or off
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC] and
select VF2 ‘Safe Title.’
The Misc >Safe Title menu appears.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the signal to which the settings
apply.
• Directly press the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob to make the setting.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Output
Signal to which the settings
apply
1 to 48
Notes
• It is not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe
title is set off in a Setup menu.
• The safe title function cannot be used for output signals for which
through mode is set to Enable in a Setup menu.
For more information about the Setup menu settings referred to above, see
“Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)” and “Signal Output Settings (Output
Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
320
Misc Menu Operations
3
Press [Safe Title] to set it on or off.
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the
Settings
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
In the Transition menu, for each bank you can display a list of the M/E (or
PGM/PST) transition rates and independent key (or DSK) transition rates, and
change the settings.
These settings are linked to the other transition rate setting operations.
Displaying the Transition menu
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC], then
select VF3 ‘Transition.’
The Misc >Transition menu appears.
About the Transition menu display
The display of the independent key transition rate in the Misc >Transition
menu depends on the selection in the <Key Transition> group of the
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Transition menu for each of the M/E and PGM/
PST banks.
When [Same] (On direction and Off direction settings the same) is selected
in the <Key Transition> group: Only “Key” (or “DSK” in the PGM/PST
bank) appears.
When [Independ] (On direction and Off direction settings independent) is
selected in the <Key Transition> group: “Key(On)” and “Key(Off)”
each appear. In the case of the PGM/PST bank, “DSK(On)” and
“DSK(Off)” appear.
For more details, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition
Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
Setting the transition rate in the Transition menu
For example, to make the settings for the M/E-1 bank, use the following
procedure.
To set the M/E transition rate
1
2
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press
[Transition].
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.
Misc Menu Operations
321
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Transition Rate
Transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
Note
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to
change the transition rate in this menu.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
To set the independent key transition rate
1
2
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press
[Key].
To set the key On direction or Off direction independently, press Key(On)
or Key(Off).
Turn the knobs to set the number of frames.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Key1 Trans Rate
Key 1 transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
2
Key2 Trans Rate
Key 2 transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
3
Key3 Trans Rate
Key 3 transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
4
Key4 Trans Rate
Key 4 transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
To set the fade-to-black transition rate in the Transition menu
Note
This function is not available with the CCP-9000.
1
2
322
In the Misc >Transition menu, press [FTB].
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Transition Rate
Transition rate
0 to 999 (frames)
Misc Menu Operations
AUX Menu Operations
AUX Bus Settings
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Making video process settings for an AUX bus
Make the settings as follows.
1
In the Aux/Mon >Aux Bus menu, using any of the following methods,
select the AUX bus to which the settings apply.
• Directly press the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knob to make the setting.
2
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
AUX Bus
AUX bus selection
1 to 48
Press [Video Process], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Video signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Luminance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Black level
–7.31 to +109.59
To return adjustment values to their defaults
Press [Unity].
AUX Menu Operations
323
Status Menu
The Status menu shows the following information.
• Operating status of the DME
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Viewing the DME operating status
To view the DME operating status, press the top menu selection button
[STATS] in the menu control block.
This selects VF1 ‘DME Status’ and the Status menu appears.
DME status display
For each DME channel, you can see how the DME is being used in the
corresponding operation block.
The display background color also indicates the following differences in the
way in which a DME is being used.
Blue: The DME is currently being used in other than the final program output.
Red: The DME is currently being used in the final program output.
324
Status Menu
Router Control Menu Operations
Using the Router >Router Control >Router Control menu, you can carry out
router switching operations.
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination
You can check the list of signals currently input for each destination.
1
2
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [RTR], then
select VF1 ‘Router Control’ and HF1 ‘Router Control.’
The following menu appears, and the left side of the status area shows a
list for destination assignments.
If in the Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu, [Inhibit] is set to On for a
destination, the corresponding line appears in gray. Also, if [PROT] (protect)
is set to ON for a source, using a BKSR3xxx or R1xxx series Router remote
control, a padlock icon appears.
The right side of the status area shows the level assignment status to the Level
1 to Level 4 buttons.
Selecting the level
In the Level Button No group at the lower right in the above illustration, press
the selected level for switching.
Router Control Menu Operations
325
Switching the Source for Each Destination
You can switch the source for each destination with a menu operation.
For the assignment of destinations and sources to buttons, use the Setup
>Panel >Aux Assign >RTR Mode Setting menu. For details, refer to “Using
the Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
1
Press [Change Xpt].
The Router >Router Control >Router Control >Change Xpt menu appears.
Destination Select buttons appear in groups of 16.
Source Select buttons appear by group (maximum 24 buttons).
2
Press one of the Destination Select buttons, to select the destination for
which you want to switch the source.
To change the group
Press one of the [1-16], [17-32], [33-48], and [49-64] buttons.
3
Press one of the Source Select buttons, to select the source you want to
switch.
To change the group
Press one of the [1-24], [25-48], ... [97-120], and [121-128] buttons.
326
Router Control Menu Operations
Video Process
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
The term “video process” is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue
of the input video signal.
There are two types of adjustment, depending on the application:
• Adjustment of an individual primary input signal
• Image effects on a particular bus
Note
These types of adjustment may be carried out independently. However, since
they are implemented by the same hardware, if the same signal is subjected to
processing twice, there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in
the final result.
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal
For each of primary inputs 1 to 49, you can switch video process adjustments
on or off, and can adjust the parameters (Video Gain, Y Gain, C Gain, Hue
Delay, and Black Level) in the Setup menu. The adjustments do not, however,
apply to the output video on the MON (monitor) bus.
For details of the settings, see “Signal Input Settings” in Chapter 20 (Volume
3).
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus
Buses to which the adjustments apply
For each of the following buses, you can switch video process adjustments on
or off, and adjust the parameters.
• Following buses in the M/E-1and PGM/PST banks
– Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4
– Background A and background B buses
– Utility bus
• Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses
• Aux 1 to 48 buses
These settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots.
Video Process
327
Making the adjustments
Adjust VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, and HUE DELAY
in the following menus.
Applicable bus
M/E-1 bank
Menu used for operation See page
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Key fill buses for keys
1 to 4
M/E-1 menu
page 172
Background A and B
buses
Video Process menu
page 329
Key fill buses for
DSK1 to DSK4
PGM/PST menu
page 172
Background A and B
buses
Video Process menu
page 329
Utility bus
PGM/PST bank
Utility bus
Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses
Frame Memory menu
page 268
Aux 1 to 48 buses
AUX/MON menu
page 323
Video Process Memory
When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus, this
function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals. The video
process on/off setting is not saved.
When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved, and
these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected.
In other words, by switching video process memory on, regardless of the video
process information for each bus, you can carry out video process adjustments
for each input signal.
The parameters saved are as follows.
VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, HUE DELAY
Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu.
For details of setting operations, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes, Frame
Memory and Color Correction (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in Chapter 20
(Volume 3).
328
Video Process
Video Process Settings
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
This section describes operations on the M/E-1 and PGM/PST background A
and B buses, and utility buse.
For these operations, use the Misc >Video Process menu in the respective
operating bank.
For video process settings on other buses, see the following.
• Settings for a particular input signal: “Signal input settings” in Chapter 20
(Volume 3)
• Key fill bus settings: “Video Processing” (page 172)
• Settings for frame memory source buses 1 and 2: “Setting video processing”
(page 268)
• Settings for Aux 1 to 48 buses: “Making video process settings for an AUX
bus” (page 323)
• Overview of video process: “Video Process” (page 327)
This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M/E-1 bank.
For the background B bus or utility bus, make the adjustment with a similar
procedure.
Making video process settings for each bus
1
2
3
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [M/E1] and
select VF7 ‘Misc’ and HF2 ‘Video Process.’
In the <Bkgd-A> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Video signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Luminance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Black level
–7.31 to +109.59
To return the parameter settings to the defaults
Press [Unity] in the <Bkgd-A> group.
Video Process Settings
329
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds, Copy and Swap, and Other Settings
Video Process Settings
330
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Preparations ..............................................................................................332
Overall Color Corrector Operations ......................................................334
Enabling Color Corrector ..................................................................334
Copy and Swap Operations ...............................................................334
Color Corrector Functions ......................................................................336
Input Video Processing Operations ...................................................336
Primary Color Correction Operations ...............................................337
Secondary Color Correction Operations ...........................................340
RGB Clip Operations ........................................................................341
Luminance Processing Operations ....................................................342
Spot Color Adjustment ......................................................................345
Output Video Processing Operations ................................................347
YUV Clip Operations ........................................................................348
Preparations
The color corrector enables video signal color correction (black balance/white
balance adjustment, gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).
Note
To use the color corrector BZS-6420 Color Corrector Software and MKS8442G Frame Memory Board required. To use the software, you are required
to input an install key.
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Assigning the color corrector input buses to AUX delegation
buttons
There are two inputs for capturing material to the color corrector: the CCR1
bus and the CCR2 bus.
For details of the input assignment operation, see “Auxiliary Bus Control
Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Selecting the color correction input signal
After assigning CCR1 and CCR2 to AUX buses, use the following procedure.
1
2
Press the AUX delegation buttons assigned to CCR1 (or CCR2).
In the cross-point button row, select the signal to which you want to apply
color correction.
Note
The signals you can select on the CCR1 and CCR2 buses are limited to the
primary inputs and frame memory outputs (FM1 to FM8). However you
can make all the internal signals of the switcher selectable by a setting in
the Setup menu.
For details, see “Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings” in Chapter 20
(Volume 3).
Selecting the color corrector output signal
By assigning the signal output from the color corrector to a cross-point button,
you can make that signal available on that button.
332
Preparations
For details of the assignment process, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign
Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Accessing the CCR menu
For color correction operations, use the CCR menu.
To access the CCR menu, in the menu control block, press the top menu
selection button [CCR].
The following description uses CCR1 as an example. To apply color correction
to CCR2, replace VF1 ‘CCR1’ by VF2 ‘CCR2,’ and follow the same
procedure.
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Preparations
333
Overall Color Corrector Operations
Enabling Color Corrector
To enable the functions of color corrector 1, for example, use the following
procedure.
1
2
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and any HF.
In the <CCR> group, press [CCR], turning it on.
This enables the functions of color corrector 1.
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Returning all color corrector settings to their defaults
1
In the <CCR> group, press [Unity].
A confirmation message appears.
2
Press [Yes].
This returns all color corrector settings to their defaults, whether [CCR] is
on or off.
Copy and Swap Operations
Copying color corrector data
1
In the CCR menu, press VF3 ‘Copy/Swap.’
The Copy/Swap menu appears.
The status area shows a copy source list on the left and a copy destination
list on the right.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the copy source data and copy
destination data.
• Press directly on the list in the status area.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
334
Overall Color Corrector Operations
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Left No
Select copy source data
1 or 2
Right No
Select copy destination
data
1 or 2
Press [Copy].
This carries out the copy.
Swapping color corrector data
Refer to the procedure described in the previous item “Copying color corrector
data.” In step 3, press [Swap] instead of [Copy].
Overall Color Corrector Operations
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
To undo copy or swap
In the Copy/Swap menu, press [Undo].
The state before carrying out the copy or swap is restored.
335
Color Corrector Functions
This section describes the color corrector functions.
For each of the following operations, it is possible to copy or swap data
between two color correctors (CCR1 and CCR2).
Input Video Processing Operations
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Carry out the following corrections to a YUV signal before conversion to an
RGB signal.
• Overall gain adjustment of the video signal
• Gain adjustment of the Y signal
• Gain adjustment of the C signal
• Hue delay
• Black level adjustment
To apply input video processing effects, use the following procedure.
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF1 ‘Input Process.’
The Input Process menu appears.
2
3
In the <Input Process> group, press [Input Process], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Video signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Y signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Black level
–116.90 to +116.90
To return the parameters to their default settings
Press [Unity] in the <Input Process> group.
336
Color Corrector Functions
Primary Color Correction Operations
Carry out the following corrections to each of the R, G, and B signals.
Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 0% level input signal.
White balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 100% level input
signal.
Gamma correction: adjusting the curvature of the gamma curve.
Knee correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the gamma
curve.
Output level
White balance adjustment
Output level
Gamma
correction
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Input level
Input level
Knee correction
Black balance adjustment
Unadjusted signal
Adjusted signal
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.
Applying primary color correction
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF2 ‘Primary CCR.’
The Primary CCR menu appears.
2
3
In the <Primary CCR> group, press [Primary CCR], turning it on.
In the <Primary CCR Adjust> group, select the setting item.
Black: black balance adjustment
White: white balance adjustment
Gamma: gamma correction
Knee: knee correction
Color Corrector Functions
337
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Black or Gamma is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Red
Red signal adjustment
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Green
Green signal adjustment
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Blue
Blue signal adjustment
–100.00 to +100.00
4
All
Simultaneous RGB adjustment
Red value is shown
• When White is selected
Knob
Parameter
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Red
Red signal adjustment
0.00 to 200.00
Green
Green signal adjustment
0.00 to 200.00
3
Blue
Blue signal adjustment
0.00 to 200.00
4
All
Simultaneous RGB adjustment
Red value is shown
• When Knee is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
2
Red
Red signal adjustment
20.00 to 75.00
Green
Green signal gain
20.00 to 75.00
3
Blue
Blue signal gain
20.00 to 75.00
4
All
Simultaneous RGB adjustment
Red value is shown
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Primary CCR> group, press [Unity].
Masking a part of the primary color correction
Here the procedure for mask 1 operation is described by way of example. You
can carry out mask 2 operation in a similar way.
1
2
In the <Primary Mask> group of the Primary CCR menu, press [Mask1],
turning it on.
Press [Mask1 Adjust].
The Mask1 Adjust menu appears.
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.
Box: signal from dedicated box generator
Pattern: signal from dedicated pattern generator
338
Color Corrector Functions
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Box is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Top
Top position
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Left
Left position
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Right
Right position
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Bottom
Bottom position
–100.00 to +100.00
5
Soft
Degree of softness of box
0.00 to 100.00
• When Pattern is selected
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Degree of softness of pattern
edge
0.00 to 100.00
5
Pattern
Pattern number
1 to 24
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Knob
For the pattern selection, you can also press [Mask Ptn Select] in the
Mask1 Adjust menu, then use the Mask Ptn Select menu.
Press any of the displayed patterns (1 to 24) to select it, then you can adjust
the following parameters.
5
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Size
Pattern size
0.00 to 100.00
2
Soft
Degree of softness of pattern
edge
0.00 to 100.00
When selecting the pattern as a mask source, set the pattern modifiers as
required.
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
2
Position V
Vertical position
–200.00 to +200.00 a)
a) See “Setting the wipe position (Positioner)” (page 207).
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the same pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
H Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
horizontally
1 to 63
Color Corrector Functions
339
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
2
V Multi
Number of repetitions of pattern
vertically
1 to 63
3
Invert Type
Replication layout
1 to 4 a)
a) See “Setting the wipe pattern replication (Multi)” (page 211).
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Aspect
aspect ratio
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See “Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)” (page 210).
• When turning the [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting
the pattern
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Angle
Angle of pattern rotation
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See “Angle” (page 208).
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the
pattern at a fixed rate
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Speed
Rotation rate of pattern
–100.00 to +100.00 a)
a) See “Speed” (page 209).
6
To invert the mask source, return to the Primary CCR menu and press
[Mask Invert], turning it on.
Note
The mask function is common to the primary color correction, secondary color
correction luminance processing, and spot color adjustment functions. For
example, if in primary color correction you set mask 1 to a box, then in
secondary color correction set mask 1 to a pattern, this also changes the setting
in primary color correction to the pattern.
Secondary Color Correction Operations
For the six colors R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), C (cyan), and M
(magenta), adjust the luminance and saturation, and also the hue within a range
of ±30 degrees of the center value for each color.
340
Color Corrector Functions
You can mask a part of the region to be corrected.
Applying secondary color correction
1
In the CCR menu, select VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF3 ‘Secondary CCR.’
The Secondary CCR menu appears.
2
3
4
In the <Secondary CCR> group, press [Secondary CCR], turning it on.
In the <Secondary CCR Adjust> group, select the color for which you
want to make the setting.
Adjust the following parameters.
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 200.00
3
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Knob
To return the parameter settings to their default values
In the <Secondary CCR> group press [Unity].
Masking a part of the secondary color correction
In the <Secondary Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same operation as described under “Masking a part of the primary
color correction” (page 338).
RGB Clip Operations
For each of the R, G, and B signals, you can make dark clip and white clip
adjustments.
Making RGB clip adjustments
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF4 ‘RGB Clip.’
The RGB Clip menu appears.
2
In the <RGB Clip> group, press [RGB Clip], turning it on.
Color Corrector Functions
341
3
In the <RGB Clip Adjust> group, select the item you want to adjust.
Dark: dark clip adjustment
White: white clip adjustment
4
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Red
Red signal adjustment
–50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
2
Green
Green signal adjustment
–50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
3
Blue
Blue signal adjustment
–50.00 to +149.99 a)
–49.99 to +150.00 b)
4
All
Simultaneous RGB adjustment
Red value is shown
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
a) When Dark is selected
b) When White is selected
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <RGB Clip> group, press [Unity].
Luminance Processing Operations
After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a
YUV signal, divide the luminance levels into three regions, referred to as Dark,
Middle, and Bright, and apply video signal adjustments to these regions.
Under Dark point
Dark
Middle/Dark point
Middle
Over Bright point
Bright/Middle point
Bright
Input signal
luminance level
There are three modes for luminance processing, as follows.
Tint mode: adding a specified color to the original video signal.
Color Modify mode: adjusting the original video signal.
Y Modify mode: adjusting the output levels of the input luminance signal.
• White balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input
luminance signal at the 100% level.
• Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input
luminance signal at the 0% level.
342
Color Corrector Functions
• Y lift correction: adjusting the curvature of the curve.
• Y dark correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the
curve.
Output signal
luminance level
White balance adjustment
Output signal luminance level
Y Lift
Input signal
luminance
level
Y Dark
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Input signal
luminance
level
Black balance adjustment
Unadjusted signal
Adjusted signal
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.
Applying luminance processing
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF5 ‘Luminance Process.’
The Luminance Process menu appears.
2
3
In the <Luminance Process> group, press [Luminance Process], turning it
on.
In the <Mode> group, specify the adjustment mode.
Tint: add a specified color to the original video signal.
Color Modify: adjust the original video signal.
Y Modify: adjust the output levels of the input luminance signal.
When tint mode or color modify mode is selected, skip to step 4.
When Y modify mode is selected, adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
White
White balance adjustment
0.00 to 200.00
2
Black
Black balance adjustment
–100.00 to +100.00
Color Corrector Functions
343
4
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
3
Y Lift
Curvature of curve
–100.00 to +100.00
4
Y Dark
Position of maximum point of
curve
–7.31 to +109.59
In the <Bound> group, make the settings for the three regions (Dark,
Middle, and Bright).
• [Level] parameters: set the boundaries of the three regions.
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Over B Level Luminance level of the Over
Bright point
50.00 to 150.00
2
Mid B Level
Luminance level of the Bright/
Middle point
10.00 to 120.00
3
Dark Mid
Level
Luminance level of the Middle/
Dark point
–20.00 to +90.00
4
Under D
Level
Luminance level of the Under
Dark point
–50.00 to +50.00
• [Soft] parameters: set the degree of boundary softness of the three
regions.
5
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Over B Soft
Degree of softness at Over Bright
point
15.00 to 70.00
2
Mid B Soft
Degree of softness at Bright/
Middle point
15.00 to 42.50
3
Dark Mid
Soft
Degree of softness at Middle/Dark 15.00 to 42.50
point
4
Under D Soft Degree of softness at Under Dark
point
15.00 to 70.00
In the <Luminance Process Adjust> group, press [Dark], [Mid], or
[Bright], and adjust the following parameters for the three regions.
• In tint mode
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
1
Luminance
Luminance
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
• In color modify mode
344
Setting values
Color Corrector Functions
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
–100.00 to +100.00
2
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
0.00 to 200.00
3
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Luminance Process> group, press [Unity].
Masking a part of luminance processing
In the <Luminance Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same procedure as in “Masking a part of the primary color
correction” (page 338).
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Spot Color Adjustment
You can change the color of a specified color region to a different color,
without affecting other regions. You can also mask part of such a region.
Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed, you
can make the following corrections.
• Video signal overall gain adjustment
• Y signal gain adjustment
• Y signal offset adjustment
• C signal gain adjustment
• C signal hue adjustment
Adjusting the color of the specified region (key)
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF6 ‘Spot CCR/Output.’
The Spot CCR/Output menu appears.
2
3
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Spot CCR], turning it on.
In the <Auto> group, press [Sample Mark], turning it on.
Note
When [Sample Mark] is on, the effects of color adjustment outside the
region of spot color adjustment (see page 347) and output video processing
(see page 347) are temporarily disabled.
Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.
Color Corrector Functions
345
4
5
Adjust the parameters so that the color you want to change is included
within the sample mark.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Position H
Horizontal position
–100.00 to +100.00
2
Position V
Vertical position
–100.00 to +100.00
3
Size
Size
1.00 to 100.00
In the <Auto> group, press [Auto Start], to adjust the key automatically.
Note
This automatic adjustment does not carry out key gain adjustment. If
required, adjust the key gain as shown in step 6.
6
Press [Key Adjust], and adjust the following parameters.
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Knob
7
8
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
–7.31 to +109.59
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
4
Gain
Key gain
–100.00 to +100.00
Press [Window], turning it on, to adjust the key detection range for spot
color adjustment.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
0.00 to 100.00
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Spot CCR] to display the parameters, and
adjust the replacement color.
.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Luminance
Luminance
0.00 to 100.00
2
Saturation
Saturation
0.00 to 100.00
3
Hue
Hue
359.99 to 0.00
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Spot CCR> group, press [Unity].
346
Color Corrector Functions
Masking a part of the spot color adjustment
In the <Spot CCR Mask> group, press [Mask1] or [Mask2], turning it on, then
carry out the same procedure as in “Masking a part of the primary color
correction” (page 338).
Adjusting the color outside the spot color adjustment region
1
2
In the Spot CCR/Output menu, press [Outer Out Proc] in the <Outer Out
Proc> group, turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Video signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
Y Gain
Y signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Black level
–116.90 to +116.90
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
2
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Outer Out Proc> group, press [Unity].
Output Video Processing Operations
Carry out the following corrections are available on the YUV signal.
• Video signal overall gain adjustment
• Y signal gain adjustment
• Y signal offset adjustment
• C signal gain adjustment
• C signal hue adjustment
Applying output video processing effects
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF6 ‘Spot CCR/Output.’
The Spot CCR/Output menu appears.
2
3
In the <Output Process> group, press [Output Process], turning it on.
Adjust the following parameters.
Color Corrector Functions
347
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
Video Gain
Video signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
2
Y Gain
Y signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
3
C Gain
Chrominance signal gain
–200.00 to +200.00
4
Hue Delay
Hue delay
–180.00 to +180.00
5
Black Level
Black level
–116.90 to +116.90
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <Output Process> group, press [Unity].
YUV Clip Operations
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
For each of the luminance and color difference signals, the following
processing is available.
White clip: setting the maximum level of the luminance signal.
Dark clip: setting the minimum level of the luminance signal.
Positive clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the positive direction of the
color difference signal.
Negative clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the negative direction of the
color difference signal.
Applying YUV clip processing
1
In the CCR menu, press VF1 ‘CCR1’ and HF7 ‘YUV Clip.’
The YUV Clip menu appears.
2
3
In the <YUV Clip> group, press [YUV Clip], turning it on.
In the <YUV Clip Adjust> group, select the target for adjustment.
Luminance: settings for the luminance signal.
Chroma: settings for the color difference signal.
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, adjust the following parameters.
• When Luminance is selected
348
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
White Clip
White clip adjustment
–6.85 to +109.13
2
Dark Clip
Dark clip adjustment
–6.85 to +109.13
Color Corrector Functions
• When Chroma is selected
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
1
U Posi Clip
Positive clip adjustment for U
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
2
U Nega Clip
Negative clip adjustment for U
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
3
V Posi Clip
Positive clip adjustment for V
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
4
V Nega Clip
Negative clip adjustment for V
signal
–113.39 to +113.39
To return the parameters to their default settings
In the <YUV Clip> group, press [Unity].
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
Color Corrector Functions
349
Chapter 9 Color Corrector
350
Color Corrector Functions
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Side Flags ...................................................................................................352
Overview ...........................................................................................352
Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................352
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ..........................................354
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ............................355
Simple P/P Software .................................................................................357
Overview ...........................................................................................357
Restrictions on Use ............................................................................357
Simple P/P Output Signal Selection on an M/E ................................360
Side Flags
Overview
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a
separate image selected from the utility bus.
You can adjust the width of the side flag area.
Side Flag Settings
Input source aspect ratio, auto side flags, and auto crop settings
Aspect ratio 4:3 setting
Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4:3. If set to 16:9, the side flags are disabled.
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Auto side flag setting
This function automatically applies side flags when a 4:3 signal is selected in
the cross-point control block.
Auto crop setting
When carrying out a DME wipe, this function automatically crops the image
during transition to 4:3.
Adjusting the width of the side flag area
You can set the left and right sides separately.
For the operation for the above setting, see “Settings for Switcher
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).
Enabling and disabling side flags with a menu operation
You can enable or disable side flags for the backgrounds (A and B) of each of
the M/E and PGM/PST banks.
As an example, to enable side flags for background B row on the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
352
Side Flags
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF3 ‘Side Flags.’
The Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu appears.
The status area shows the buttons for Bkgd A and Bkgd B for each of the
M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST (P/P) banks.
2
In the <M/E-1 Side Flags> group, press [Bkgd B].
Each time you press the button toggles between Enable and Disable.
To display a menu for the aspect ratio 4:3, auto side flags, and auto
crop settings
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Setup >SWER >Side Flags].
To display a menu for assigning the side flags on/off function to a
cross-point button
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].
Enabling and disabling side flags with a button operation
For example, to enable side flags for the background B row of the M/E-1 bank,
use the following procedure.
1
First, in the Setup menu assign the rightmost cross-point button to the
[SIDE FLAG] button.
For details of the assignment operation, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt
Assign Menu)” in Chapter 19 (Volume 3).
Chapter 10 Special Functions
2
Press the [SIDE FLAG] button at the right end of the background B row of
the M/E-1 bank.
The button you pressed lights amber, and this enables the side flags.
Notes
• The operations of enabling or disabling the side flags by menu operation
and by control panel button operation are linked.
• When the auto side flags are on, selecting a 4:3 video material
automatically lights the [SIDE FLAG] button, but if you press this
button, turning it off, the side flags are temporarily disabled.
However, when you select a different 4:3 video material, the [SIDE
FLAG] button automatically lights once again, enabling the side flags.
Creating an image with side flags
For example, to create an image with side flags in the background B row of the
M/E-1 bank, use the following procedure.
Side Flags
353
1
2
In the M/E-1 bank cross-point control block, hold down the [UTIL] button,
and in the background A row select the signal (utility bus signal) you want
to insert in the side flag areas.
In the background B row, press the cross-point button corresponding to the
4:3 video material.
At this point, if auto side flags are on, this automatically adds side flags to
the 4:3 video material. (See “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config
Menu)” in Chapter 20 (Volume 3).)
3
Use either of the following methods to turn the side flags on.
• Use the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu. (See page 352)
• Use a cross-point button operation. (See previous item.)
This adds side flags to the 4:3 video material.
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags
When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns can
be used.
The following illustration shows the action in a wipe.
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image
Side flag areas
4:3 image (Side flags on)
354
Side Flags
16:9 image
Wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags are
on for both images)
Side flag areas
4:3 image (Side flags on)
Side flag areas
The circles indicate the
position of the wipe pattern
edge when the transition is
half finished.
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags
Chapter 10 Special Functions
When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns
can be used.
Depending on the setting (On/Off) of [Auto Crop] in the Engineering Setup
>Switcher >Config menu, the appearance of the 4:3 image changes.
• For signals with the following DME wipe pattern selected on the DME
external video bus (gray part shown in the pattern illustration), side flags are
not applied when auto side flags are set to Off.
– Two-channel frame in-out
– Two-channel brick
The following illustration shows the action in a DME wipe.
Side Flags
355
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image
Wipe action using slide (No. 1001)
Side flag area
Auto crop off
Side flag areas
Auto crop on
16:9 image
4:3 image (Side flags on)
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags
are on for both images)
Wipe action using squeeze (No. 1031)
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Side flag areas a)
Auto crop off
Side flag areas
Side flag areas
Auto crop on
4:3 image (Side flags on)
356
Side Flags
4:3 image (Side flags on)
Simple P/P Software
Overview
By installing the BZS-6250 Simple P/P Software in the MVS-6000 Switcher
Processor, you can use a separate program/preset function without using the M/
E hardware.
Getting access to the software
To use the Simple P/P Software, you are required to enter an install key which
validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key
is not required.)
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.
On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu
of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see “Installation and
Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 18 (Volume 3).
Chapter 10 Special Functions
Restrictions on Use
Since this software is a simple version of the program/preset function, there are
some restrictions on use. The following lists the points at which operation is
different from a normal program/preset function. For details of the normal
operations, set the relevant sections of this manual.
Restrictions on using a downstream key
• DSK3 and DSK4 cannot be used.
For the key priority, set priority 1 or priority 2.
• The following downstream key types cannot be used.
– Chroma key
– Color vector key
– Key wipe pattern key
• When using a matte as the key fill for a downstream key, a mix color cannot
be used.
• It is not possible to modify a downstream key edge. The edge blink also
cannot be used.
• For a downstream key, mask cannot be used.
Simple P/P Software
357
• A processed key cannot be used. Therefore, it is not possible to apply a DME
effect to a downstream key.
• As an independent key transition type, wipe and DME wipe cannot be used.
• The resizer cannot be used.
• The key frame delay mode cannot be used.
Restrictions on executing transitions in the transition control
block
• Wipes can be used, but there are restrictions on use. For details, see the next
item, “Restrictions when using wipes.”
• You can use a DME wipe for a background transition only. For details, see
“Restrictions when using DME wipes” (page 358).
Restrictions when using wipes
• The wipe patterns that can be used are pattern numbers 1 to 24 only.
• When a border or soft border is selected for a wipe edge, the signal to be
inserted in the edge (edge fill) is restricted as follows.
– The utility bus cannot be selected.
– When using a matte, a mix color cannot be used.
Restrictions when using DME wipes
Chapter 10 Special Functions
• You can use a DME wipe for a background transition only.
• The patterns that can be selected are as follows. (One-channel patterns only)
Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze
Door: door
Flip Tumble: flip tumble
Frame I/O/P in P: frame in-out, picture-in-picture
Mosaic/Defocus: mosaic and defocus
Brick: brick
Notes
• For flip tumble, the background is filled with the same color as the wipe
border matte (single color).
• Door patterns 1045 to 1048 cannot be used.
Restrictions on utility buses
The utility bus cannot be used.
358
Simple P/P Software
Assignment of signals to output connectors
Note
The output connector OUT24 cannot be used.
Connectors to which the P/P row output signal assignment is fixed
The assignment of the following signals to output connectors OUT17 to OUT2
2 is fixed.
Except for Preset, you can select these signals on the AUX bus for output.
Output
connector
Fixed assigned outputs
Standard mode
Multi-program mode
OUT17
Program
P/P OUT1 a)
OUT18
Program
P/P OUT1 a)
OUT19
Preview
P/P OUT2 a)
OUT20
Clean
P/P OUT3 a)
OUT21
Key preview
P/P OUT4 a)
OUT22
Preset
Preset
a) Depends on the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu.
Logical assignment of the physical PGM/PST
Chapter 10 Special Functions
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >Logical M/E Assign menu, it is
not possible to assign the physical PGM/PST as a logical PGM/PST.
In the <Logical M/E to Physical P/P> group, you can select from M/E-1, M/E2, and M/E-3.
Configuration of the switcher bank outputs
If Multi Program mode is selected in setup (M/E Config in the Switcher
>Config menu), then for Bkgd in the PGM Config menu, it is only possible to
select Clean.
Assigning a simple P/P re-entry signal to a primary input
When returning output from a simple P/P to a primary input, use the following
procedure to set where the signal returns.
1
In the Switcher >Output menu, select [Output Assign] and press [Simple
P/P Re-Entry Assign].
The Simple P/P Re-Entry Assign menu appears.
Simple P/P Software
359
The status area shows the output ports and assigned primary inputs on the
left, and a list of primary inputs that can be assigned on the right.
2
Using any of the following methods, select the output port number and
signal to be assigned.
• Press directly on the list in the status area to make the selection.
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.
• Turn the knobs.
3
Knob
Parameter
Adjustment
Setting values
V1
Output No.
Output port number
1 to 23
V2
Source No.
Primary input number 0 to 49
Press [Set].
This assigns the primary input to the selected output port.
To clear a primary input assignment
Press [Inhibit].
This clears the assignment and “No Assign” is displayed in the Re-Entry
column.
Simple P/P Output Signal Selection on an M/E
Chapter 10 Special Functions
You can select a simple P/P output on an M/E.
Preparations
Interface connection
Connect the simple P/P output signal to return to a primary input via a BNC
cable.
System setup
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Output >Simple P/P R-Entry Assign
menu, specifies the primary input to which the simple P/P output signal returns.
Selecting the input on an M/E bank
Select a primary input on the cross-point control block of an M/E bank. You
can select a simple P/P output signal with the same phase as that of the other
input signals.
360
Simple P/P Software
Appendix (Volume 1)
Wipe Pattern List .....................................................................................362
DME Wipe Pattern List ...........................................................................363
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .....................363
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode .....................367
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................370
Menu Tree .................................................................................................372
Recalling Menus ................................................................................372
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus .....................................................................372
PGM/PST Menu ................................................................................375
Frame Memory Menu ........................................................................377
Color Bkgd Menu ..............................................................................378
AUX/MON Menu ..............................................................................378
CCR Menu .........................................................................................379
Copy/Swap Menu ..............................................................................380
Misc Menu .........................................................................................380
Status Menu .......................................................................................380
DME Menu ........................................................................................381
Global Effect Menu ...........................................................................382
Device Menu .....................................................................................382
Macro Menu ......................................................................................383
Key Frame Menu ...............................................................................384
Effect Menu .......................................................................................385
Snapshot Menu ..................................................................................386
Shotbox Menu ...................................................................................387
File Menu ..........................................................................................388
Engineering Setup Menu ...................................................................389
Diagnostic Menu ...............................................................................393
Wipe Pattern List
Appendix (Volume 1)
362
Wipe Pattern List
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DME Wipe Pattern List
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode
Slide
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
Squeeze
Appendix (Volume 1)
DME Wipe Pattern List
363
Door
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1061
1062
1063
1064
2D trans
Appendix (Volume 1)
1068
364
DME Wipe Pattern List
3D trans
1071
1072
1074
1076
1077
1088
1091
1092
1093
1094
Flip tumble
1102
1103
1104
1109
1110
1121
1122
1124
1131
1132
1133
Appendix (Volume 1)
1101
1135
DME Wipe Pattern List
365
Frame in-out
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1221
1222
1223
1224
Picture-in-picture
1251
Mosaic
1701
Appendix (Volume 1)
Defocus
1702
366
DME Wipe Pattern List
User programmable DME
The illustrations for patterns 1901 to 1999 show an effect register number or
register name.
1901
1999
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode
Slide
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
Squeeze
Appendix (Volume 1)
DME Wipe Pattern List
367
3D trans
2631
2632
2642
2644
2633
2634
Picture-in-picture
2651
2652
2801
2802
2803
2804
2811
2812
2813
2814
Brick
Appendix (Volume 1)
368
DME Wipe Pattern List
Frame in-out
2851
2852
2853
2854
2861
2862
2863
2864
User programmable DME
The illustrations for patterns 2901 to 2999 show an effect register number or
register name.
2901
2999
Appendix (Volume 1)
DME Wipe Pattern List
369
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
Slide
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
Squeeze
Appendix (Volume 1)
370
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
Frame in-out
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7221
7222
7223
7224
Appendix (Volume 1)
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List
371
Menu Tree
Recalling Menus
This section details the menu structure, and shows the top menu selection
buttons in the menu control block which are used to access the menus.
Top menu selection buttons
EXT
DISPL
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
MENU
COPY
FRAME
MEM
COLOR
BKGD
AUX
/MON
COPY
SWAP
MISC
DME
GLB
EFF
RTR
P/P
DEV
KEY
FRAME
SNAP
SHOT
SHOT
BOX
FILE
USER
SETUP
ENG
SETUP
MCRO
DIAG
PREFS
1
PREFS
2
PREFS
3
PREFS
4
PREFS
5
PREFS
6
PREFS
7
PREFS
8
Menu control block
Some menus can also be accessed by pressing other buttons twice in rapid
succession.
Appendix (Volume 1)
For more details, see “Menu Organization” (page 68).
Note
Some menus may not appear, depending on the model.
M/E-1 to M/E-3 Menus
The functions in the M/E-1, M/E-2, and M/E-3 menus are the same, but the
menu page numbers are distinguished as follows.
M/E-1 menus: 11xx, M/E-2 menus: 12xx, M/E-3 menus: 13xx
372
Menu Tree
In this section, the numbers for the M/E-1 menus are given as examples.
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], and [M/E 3] buttons
M/E-1
VF1: Key1
HF1: Type (1111)
Chroma Adjust (1111.1)
VF2: Key2
Matte Adjust (1111.2)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
VF3: Key3
Key Priority (1173)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
VF4: Key4
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
VF5: Wipe
VF6: DME Wipe
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
HF2: Edge
(1112)a)
VF7: Misc
to next page
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
Zabton Adjust (1112.3)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
Key Delay Mode (1112.4)
Mix Ptn Select (1112.2)
Main Mask(1113)
Matte Adjust (1112.1)
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
HF3: Main Mask (1113)
Mask Ptn Select (1113.1)
HF5: Processed Key (1115)
Monitor (1115.1)
Border/Crop (1115.2)a)
Resizer Process (1115.3)a)
Enhanced Effect (1115.4)a)
HF6: Transition (1116)
Wipe Adjust (1116.1)
Pattern Select (1116.2)
DME Wipe Adjust (1116.3)
Pattern Select (1116.4)
Remove From Begin
(1116.7)
Appendix (Volume 1)
HF7: Video Process (1117)
The functions in the Key 2 to Key 4 menus are the
same as those in the Key 1 menu, with the following
menu page numbers.
Key 2 menu: 112x, Key 3 menu: 113x, Key 4 menu:
114x
a) For Key 1 and Key 2 menus only
Menu Tree
373
M/E
1
M/E
2
M/E
3
[M/E 1], [M/E 2], and [M/E 3] buttons
M/E-1
VF1: Key1
VF2: Key2
to previous page
VF3: Key3
VF4: Key4
HF1: Main Pattern (1151)
VF5: Wipe
HF4: Edge/Direction (1154)
Matte Adjust (1154.1)
HF5: Main Modify (1155)
HF7: Wipe Snapshot (1157)
HF1: 1ch (1161)
VF6: DME Wipe
HF2: 2ch (1162)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1164)
HF5: Modify (1165)
Remove From Begin (1165.1)
HF7: DME Wipe Snapshot (1167)
HF1: Transition (1171)
VF7: Misc
HF2: Video Process (1172)
HF3: Key Priority (1173)
HF4: Next Key Priority (1174)
HF6: Clip Transition (1176)
Clip (1176.1)
HF7: Snapshot (1177)
Transition (1171)
Snapshot (1177)
Appendix (Volume 1)
374
Menu Tree
Mix Pattern Select (1154.2)
PGM/PST Menu
P/P
[P/P] button
PGM/PST
VF1: DSK1
HF1: Type (1411)
Chroma Adjust (1411.1)
VF2: DSK2
Matte Adjust (1411.2)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
VF3: DSK3
Key Priority (1473)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
VF4: DSK4
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
VF5: Wipe
VF6: DME Wipe
Wipe Adjust (1416.1)
HF2: Edge
(1412)a)
VF7: Misc
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
Zabton Adjust (1412.3)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
Key Delay Mode (1412.4)
Mix Ptn Select (1412.2)
to next page
Main Mask(1413)
Matte Adjust (1412.1)
Wipe Adjust (1416.1)
HF3: Main Mask (1413)
Mask Ptn Select (1413.1)
HF5: Processed Key (1415)
Monitor (1415.1)
Border/Crop (1415.2)a)
Resizer Process (1415.3)a)
Enhanced Effect (1415.4)a)
HF6: Transition (1416)
HF7: Video Process (1417)
Wipe Adjust (1416.1)
Pattern Select (1416.2)
DME Wipe Adjust (1416.3)
Pattern Select (1416.4)
Remove From Begin
(1416.7)
Appendix (Volume 1)
The functions in the DSK 2 to DSK 4 menus are the same as those in the DSK
1 menu, with the following menu page numbers.
DSK 2 menu: 142x, DSK 3 menu: 143x, DSK 4 menu: 144x
a)For DSK 1 and DSK 2 menus only
Menu Tree
375
P/P
[P/P] button
PGM/PST
VF1: DSK1
VF2: DSK2
to previous page
VF3: DSK3
VF4: DSK4
HF1: Main Pattern (1451)
VF5: Wipe
HF4: Edge/Direction (1454)
Matte Adjust (1454.1)
HF5: Main Modify (1455)
HF7: Wipe Snapshot (1457)
HF1: 1ch (1461)
VF6: DME Wipe
HF2: 2ch (1462)
HF4: Edge/Direction (1464)
HF5: Modify (1465)
Remove From Begin (1465.1)
HF7: DME Wipe Snapshot (1467)
HF1: Transition (1471)
VF7: Misc
HF2: Video Process (1472)
HF3: Key Priority (1473)
HF4: Next Key Priority (1474)
HF6: Clip Transition (1476)
Clip (1476.1)
HF7: Snapshot (1477)
Transition (1471)
Snapshot (1477)
Appendix (Volume 1)
376
Menu Tree
Mix Pattern Select (1454.2)
Frame Memory Menu
FRAME
MEM
[FRAME MEM] button
Frame Memory
HF1: Recall (2511)
HF2: Freeze/Store (2512)
VF1: Still
HF3: Composite (2513)
Input Adjust (2513.1)
VF2: Clip
HF4: Animation Record (2514)
Pattern Adjust (2513.2)
VF3: Reposition/Lock
HF5: Create Key Frame (2515)
VF4: File
HF1: Recall (2521)
VF5: Folder (2551)
HF2: Play (2522)
VF6: External HDD
HF3: Record (2523)
Pattern Select (2513.3)
HF4: Ancillary Enable (2525)
HF1: Reposition (2531)
HF2: Lock (2532)
HF1: Pair Recombination (2541)
HF4: Move (2544)
HF5: Delete (2545)
HF6: Rename (2546)
HF1: Format (2561)
HF2: Backup/Restore (2562)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
377
Color Bkgd Menu
COLOR
BKGD
[COLOR BKGD] button
Color Bkgd
VF1: Color Bkgd1 (2210)
AUX/MON Menu
AUX
MON
[AUX MON] button
Aux/Mon
VF1: Aux Bus (2311)
Appendix (Volume 1)
378
Menu Tree
Mix Pattern Select (2210.1)
CCR Menu
CCR
[CCR] button
CCR
HF1: Input Process (2411)
VF1: CCR1
HF2: Primary CCR (2412)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
HF3: Secondary CCR (2413)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
HF4: RGB Clip(2414)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
HF5: Luminance Process (2415)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
HF6: Spot CCR/Output (2416)
Mask 1 Adjust (2412.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.2)
HF7: YUV Clip (2417)
Mask 2 Adjust (2412.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2412.4)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
HF3: Secondary CCR (2423)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
HF4: RGB Clip(2424)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
HF5: Luminance Process (2425)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
HF6: Spot CCR/Output (2426)
Mask 1 Adjust (2422.1)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.2)
HF7: YUV Clip (2427)
Mask 2 Adjust (2422.3)
Mask Ptn Select (2422.4)
HF1: Input Process (2421)
VF2: CCR2
HF2: Primary CCR (2422)
VF3: Copy/Swap
(2431)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
379
Copy/Swap Menu
COPY
SWAP
[COPY SWAP] button
Copy/Swap
HF1: M/E (3111)
VF1: Copy/Swap
VF2: Copy
HF2: Key (3112)
HF3: Wipe (3113)
HF4: DME Wipe (3114)
HF5: Matte (3115)
HF6: Color (3116)
HF7: DME (3117)
HF1: Format Converter (3121)
Misc Menu
MISC
[MISC] button
Misc
HF1: Port Enable (3211)
VF1: Enable
HF2: Plug-In Editor (3212)
VF2: Safe Title (3221)
VF3: Transition (3231)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Status Menu
STATS
[STATS] button
Status
VF1: DME Status (3311)
380
Menu Tree
HF3: Side Flags (3213)
Side Flags (7331.7)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
DME Menu
DME
[DME] button
HF1: Border/Crop (4111)
HF2: Beveled Edge (4112)
HF3: Key Border (4113)
DME
VF1: Edge
HF4: Art Edge (4114)
HF5: Flex Shadow (4115)
HF6: Wipe Crop (4116)
Pattern Select (4116.1)
HF7: Color Mix (4117)
Mix Pattern Select (4117.1)
VF2: Video Modify
HF1: Defocus/Blur (4121)
Mask (4127)
VF3: Freeze
HF2: Multi Move (4122)
VF4: Non-Linear
HF3: Color Modify (4123)
Mask (4127)
HF4: Mosaic (4124)
Mask (4127)
HF7: Mask (4127)
VF5: Light/Trail
HF1: Freeze (4131)
Wave (4141.1)
VF6: Input/Output
HF1: Type (4141)
Mosaic Glass (4141.2) Lens (4141.16)
VF7: Enhanced
Video Modify
HF1: Lighting (4151)
Flag (4141.3)
Circle (4141.17)
HF2: Trail (4152)
Twist (4141.4)
Panorama (4141.18)
HF3: Motion Decay (4153)
Ripple (4141.5)
Page Turn (4141.19)
HF4: KF Strobe (4154)
Rings (4141.7)
Roll (4141.20)
HF5: Wind (4155)
Broken Glass (4141.8) Cylinder (4141.21)
HF6: Spot Lighting (4156)
Flying Bars (4141.9)
Sphere (4141.22)
Blind (4141.10)
Explosion (4141.25)
Split (4141.11)
Swirl (4141.26)
Split Slide (4141.12)
Melt (4141.27)
Mirror (4141.13)
Character Trail (4141.28)
HF1: Bkgd (4161)
HF2: Video/Key (4162)
HF3: Process (4163)
HF4: Graphic (4164)
Kaleidoscope (4141.15)
Multi Mirror (4141.14)
Mix Pattern Select (4117.1)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Color Mix (4117)
Texture Ptn Select (4156.1)
Copy/Swap (4156.2)
Light1 (4156.3)
Light Color Adjust (4156.4)
Light2 (4156.5)
Light Color Adjust (4156.6)
Light3 (4156.7)
Light Color Adjust (4156.8)
HF1: Sketch (4171)
Mask(4127)
HF2: Metal (4172)
Mask(4127)
HF3: Dim & Fade (4173)
HF4: Glow (4174)
Mask(4127)
Menu Tree
381
Global Effect Menu
GLB
EFF
[GLB EFF] button
Global Effect
VF1: Ch1-Ch4a)
HF1: Combiner Priority (4211)
VF2: Ch5-Ch8
HF2: Brick (4212)
HF3: Shadow (4213)
HF7: Combine Gp Select (4217)
HF1: Combiner Priority (4221)
HF2: Brick (4222)
HF3: Shadow (4223)
HF7: Combine Gp Select (4227)
a) When using the MKS-6470 DME
Board Set, the button is indicated
as “VF1: Ch1-Ch2”.
Device Menu
DEV
[DEV] button
Device
Appendix (Volume 1)
VF1: GPI Timeline
HF1: GPI Timeline (5311)
Rewind Action (5311.1)
VF2: P-Bus Timeline
HF1: P-Bus Timeline (5321)
Rewind Action (5321.1)
VF3: DDR/VTR
HF1: Cueup & Play (5331)
HF2: Timeline (5332)
HF3: File List (5333)
382
Menu Tree
Rewind Action (5332.1)
Macro Menu
MCRO
[MCRO] button
Macro
VF1: Register
HF2: Lock (5412)
On Line Edit (7142.2)
VF2: Attachment (5421)
HF3: Copy (5413)
Off Line Edit (7143.2)
HF6: Delete (5416)
HF7: Rename (5417)
VF3: Menu Macro Register
HF1: Recall & Run (5431)
Menu Macro Edit (7144.2)
HF2: Lock (5432)
HF3: Copy (5433)
HF6: Delete (5436)
HF7: Rename (5437)
VF4: Timeline
HF1: Timeline (5441)
Rewind Action (5441.1)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
383
Key Frame Menu
KEY
FRAME
[KEY FRAME] button
M/E-1 (6113.1)
M/E-2 (6113.2)
M/E-3 (6113.3)
Key Frame
HF1: Time Line (6111)
P/P (6113.4)
User1 (6113.5)
HF3: Path (6113)
User2 (6113.6)
User3 (6113.7)
User4 (6113.8)
User5 (6113.9)
User6 (6113.10)
User7 (6113.11)
User8 (6113.12)
DME 3D Trans Local (6113.13)
DME 3D Trans Global (6113.14)
DME Effect (6113.15)
DME Global Effect (6113.16)
HF4: DME User PGM (6114)
HF5: Timeline Assign (6115)
HF7: Region Select (6117)
Appendix (Volume 1)
384
Menu Tree
10 Key Region Assign (7321.7)
Effect Menu
EFF
[EFF] button
HF1: Store (6211)
Edit (6211.1)
HF2: Lock (6212)
Effect
HF3: Copy (6213)
HF4: Move (6214)
Status (6200)
HF5: Swap (6215)
HF6: Delete (6216)
VF1: Master Timeline
VF2: Effect 1-99
VF3: Effect 101-199
VF4: Effect 201-299
HF7: Rename (6217)
HF1: Attribute (6221)
HF2: Lock (6222)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6223)
HF4: Move (6224)
HF5: Swap (6225)
HF6: Delete (6226)
HF7: Rename (6227)
HF1: Attribute (6231)
HF2: Lock (6232)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6233)
HF4: Move (6234)
HF5: Swap (6235)
HF6: Delete (6236)
HF7: Rename (6237)
HF1: Attribute (6241)
HF2: Lock (6242)
HF3: Copy/Merge (6243)
HF4: Move (6244)
Appendix (Volume 1)
HF5: Swap (6245)
HF6: Delete (6246)
HF7: Rename (6247)
Menu Tree
385
Snapshot Menu
SNAP
SHOT
[SNAPSHOT] button
HF1: Store (6311)
Edit (6311.1)
HF2: Lock (6312)
Snapshot
Status (6300)
VF1: Master Snapshot
VF2: Snapshot
VF3: Wipe Snapshot
VF4: DME Snapshot
VF5: Key Snapshot
HF3: Copy (6313)
HF4: Move (6314)
HF5: Swap (6315)
HF6: Delete (6316)
HF7: Rename (6317)
HF1: Attribute (6321)
Xpt Hold (6321.1)
HF2: Lock (6322)
Clip Event (6321.2)
HF3: Copy (6323)
HF4: Move (6324)
HF5: Swap (6325)
HF6: Delete (6326)
HF7: Rename (6327)
HF2: Lock (6332)
HF3: Copy (6333)
HF4: Move (6334)
HF5: Swap (6335)
HF6: Delete (6336)
HF7: Rename (6337)
HF2: Lock (6342)
HF3: Copy (6343)
HF4: Move (6344)
HF5: Swap (6345)
Appendix (Volume 1)
HF6: Delete (6346)
HF7: Rename (6347)
HF1: Attribute (6351)
HF2: Lock (6352)
HF3: Copy (6353)
HF4: Move (6354)
HF5: Swap (6355)
HF6: Delete (6356)
HF7: Rename (6357)
386
Menu Tree
Shotbox Menu
SHOT
BOX
[SHOTBOX] button
Shotbox
VF1: Register
HF1: Store/Recall (6411)
VF2: Module Like Control
HF2: Lock (6412)
Edit (6411.1)
HF3: Copy (6413)
HF4: Move (6414)
HF5: Swap (6415)
HF6: Delete (6416)
HF7: Rename (6417)
HF2: Bank1-4
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
387
File Menu
FILE
[FILE] button
File
VF1: Setup, Init, VK Mem
VF2: Effect
VF3: Snapshot
VF4: Shotbox, Macro
VF5: Frame Mem
VF6: All, External File
VF7: Configure
HF1: Setup (7111)
File Edit (7111.1)
HF2: Initial Status (7112)
File Edit (7112.1)
HF3: Key Memory (7113)
File Edit (7113.1)
HF4: Video Proc Memory (7114)
File Edit (7114.1)
HF1: Effect 1-99 (7121)
File Edit (7121.1)
HF2: Effect 101-199 (7122)
File Edit (7122.1)
HF3: Effect 201-299 (7123)
File Edit (7123.1)
HF1: Snapshot (7131)
File Edit (7131.1)
HF2: Wipe Snapshot (7132)
File Edit (7132.1)
HF3: DME Snapshot (7133)
File Edit (7133.1)
HF4: Key Snapshot (7134)
File Edit (7134.1)
HF1: Shotbox (7141)
File Edit (7141.1)
HF2: Macro (7142)
File Edit (7142.1)
On Line Edit (7142.2)
Off Line Edit (7142.3)
HF3: Macro Attachment (7143)
File Edit (7143.1)
HF4: Menu Macro (7144)
File Edit (7144.1)
Menu Macro Edit (7144.2)
HF1: Frame Memory (7151)
Appendix (Volume 1)
HF2: Frame Memory Folder (7152)
HF1: All (7161)
HF2: Import / Export (7162)
HF1: Directory (7171)
HF2: Unit ID Copy (7172)
HF3: Group ID Copy (7173)
388
Menu Tree
File Edit (7151.1)
Engineering Setup Menu
ENG
SETUP
[ENG SETUP] button
Engineering Setup
HF1: Network Config (7311)
Panel Assign (7312.1)
HF2: System Config (7312)
Switcher Assign (7312.2)
VF1: System
Aspect (7313.1)
Switcher Aspect (7313.2)
VF2: Panel
HF3: Format (7313)
Detail Information (7316.1)
DME Aspect (7313.3)
VF3: Switcher
HF4: Start Up (7314)
License (7316.6)
License Management (7316.7)
VF4: DME
HF5: Initialize (7315)
Unit Config (7316.8)
VF5: DCU
HF6: Install/Unit Config (7316) Texture Package (7316.9)
VF6: Router/Tally
Install (7316.10)
HF7: Maintenance (7317)
Setup Operation Lock (7317.1)
to following pages
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
389
ENG
SETUP
Link Table Adjust (7321.5)
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
to previous pages
Link Matrix Adjust (7321.4)
VF2: Panel
Link Bus Adjust (7321.6)
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
DSK Fader Assign (7321.1)
10 Key Region Assign (7321.7)
Key Trans Link (7321.2)
VF5: DCU
Link/Program Button (7321.8)
External Bus Link (7321.3)
VF6: Router/Tally
MP2 Main/Sub Assign (7321.11)
Transition Module (7321.9)
Compact Key Module Assign (7321.15)
Flexi Pad Module (7321.10)
HF1: Config (7321)
to following
pages
Xpt Module (7321.12)
Fade To Black Module (7321.13)
DSK/FTB Module (7321.14)
Device Control Module (7321.16)
Joystick/Trackball Module (7321.17)
Menu Panel (7321.19)
HF2: Xpt Assign (7322)
Table Button Assign (7322.1)
Main, V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
Main,V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
Src Name/LCD Color (7322.6)
Src Name/LCD Color (7322.6)
Table Copy (7322.8)
Name Export (7322.9)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
HF3: Aux Assign (7323)
Mixer Xpt Assign (7322.11)
Main,V/K Pair Assign (7322.5)
RTR Mode Setting (7323.1)
Source Table Assign (7323.2)
Level Button Assigh (7323.4)
HF4: Prefs/Utility (7324)
Utility Module Assign (7324.1)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Key 2/4 Bus Button Assign (7324.2)
GPI Input (7325.1)
HF5: Device Interface (7325)
Table Assign (7323.3)
H/L Set (7325.2)
GPI Output (7325.3)
DCU Serial Port Assign (7325.4)
Effect Mode (7326.2)
HF6: Operation (7326)
Flexi Pad Mode (7326.3)
Custom Button (7326.4)
Sensitivity (7326.5)
Macro (7326.6)
HF7: Maintenance (7327)
390
Menu Tree
Button Tally (7326.9)
CCP-9000 Button (7326.8)
ENG
SETUP
[ENG SETUP] button
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
VF3: Switcher
to previous pages
HF1: Config (7331)
M/E Output Assign (7331.1)
VF4: DME
PGM Config (7331.2)
VF5: DCU
K-PVW Config (7331.3)
VF6: Router/Tally
User 1-8 Config (7331.4)
Logical M/E Assign (7331.5)
to next page
DME Config (7331.6)
HF2: Input (7332)
Side Flags (7331.7)
Side Flags (3213)
Switching Timing (7331.8)
Side Flags Button Assign (7322.10)
Video Process (7332.1)
FC Adjust (7332.2) a)
HF3: Output (7333)
Output Assign (7333.1)
Video Clip (7333.2)
V Blank/Through (7333.3)
Safe Titile (7333.4)
4:3 Crop (7333.5)
FC Adjust (7333.6) a)
Simple P/P Re-Entry Assign (7333.8) a)
HF4: Transition (7334)
Preset Color Mix (7334.1)
Transition Curve (7334.2)
HF5: Key/Wipe/FM/CCR (7335)
HF6: Link (7336)
Show Key (7335.1)
Link Bus Select (7336.2)
Internal Bus Link (7336.1)
Link Table Select (7336.3)
GPI Link (7336.4)
GPI Link Adjust (7336.5)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Key Auto Drop (7335.2)
M/E Link (7336.6)
Key Transition Link (7336.7)
HF7: Device Interface (7337)
Remote Assign (7337.1)
GPI Input (7337.2)
H/L Set (7337.3)
GPI Output (7337.4)
Aux Control (7337.5)
Editor I/F (7337.8)
a) With the optional board installed only
Menu Tree
391
ENG
SETUP
[ENG SETUP] button
Engineering Setup
VF1: System
VF2: Panel
to previous pages
VF3: Switcher
VF4: DME
HF1: Input (7341)
VF5: DCU
HF3: Output (7343)
Monitor Output (7343.1)
VF6: Router/Tally
HF4: Device Interface (7344)
DME1 GPI Input (7344.1)
H/L Set (7344.2)
DME2 GPI Input (7344.4)
H/L Set (7344.5)
TBC Center (7341.1)
DME2 GPI Output (7344.6)
HF1: Input Config (7351)
HF2: GPI Input Assign (7352)
H/L Set (7352.1)
HF3: Output Config (7353)
HF4: GPI Output Assign (7354)
HF5: Serial Port Assign (7355)
P-Bus Setting (7355.1)
VTR Setting (7355.2)
DDR SD9P Setting (7355.3)
DDR VDCP Setting (7355.4)
Extended VTR Setting (7355.5)
HF1: Router (7361)
External Box Assign (7361.1)
HF2: Group Tally (7362)
HF3: Wiring (7363)
New (7363.1)
Modify (7363.2)
HF4: Tally Enable (7364)
New (7364.1)
Modify (7364.2)
HF5: Tally Copy (7365)
New (7365.1)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Modify (7365.2)
392
Menu Tree
HF6: Parallel Tally (7366)
Set (7366.1)
HF7: Serial Tally (7367)
Source Assign (7367.1)
Diagnostic Menu
DIAG
[DIAG] button
Diagnostic
VF1: Error Info
HF1: Error Status (7411)
HF2: Error Log (7412)
VF3: System Info
LAN Status (7431)
Appendix (Volume 1)
Menu Tree
393
Index
A
C
D
Additive mix 151
Ancillary data 282, 293
Angle 208
Aspect ratio 210, 216
Audio mixer 102
Auto
chroma key adjustments
154
transition 126
AUTO DELEG button 57
AUTO TRANS button 39
Auto/manual transition
combination 127
AUX
bus settings 323
delegation buttons 49
menu operations 323
AUX/MON menu 378
Auxiliary bus control block
49
Caps Lock button 85
CCR menu 379
Chroma key 142
adjustments 152
composition 151
window 153
Clean mode 142
Clear button 84, 86
Clip function 282
Clip transition 105
operations 296
Close button 84, 85
Color
combination 308, 309
matte settings 116
vector key 141
Color background
setting operations 308
settings menu 308
Color Bkgd menu 378
Color cancel 152
adjustments 155
Color corrector 331
Color data
copy 314
swap 314
Color mix 308, 309
for edge fill matte 204
for key fill 159
Color palette window 87
Control panel 34
configuration 34
Copy 312, 316
Copy/Swap menu 380
Cross-point
button numbers 37
buttons 36
control block 36
Cut 105
CUT button 40
Dead zone 253
Default recall button 77
Del button 86
Delegation buttons 54
Device
menu 382
DEVICE connectors 51
Device control block
joystick 42
search dial 62
trackball 58
Diagnostic menu 393
Digital multi effects 27
Direction 202, 214, 234
Display 48, 56
DME 27, 39
applying to a key 169,
184
channel selection buttons
56
menu 381
DME channel
copy 314
swap 314
DME monitor 56
DME override 319
DME patterns
user programmable 249
DME wipe pattern 222
edge modification 234
groups 222
selection 232
DME wipe pattern list
for one-channel mode 363
for two-channel mode
367
DME wipe settings 232
for independent key
transitions 242
DME wipes 23, 221
copy 313, 314
B
Index
Background
A/B row 36
changing 18
mask 146
Bank selection buttons 49, 65
Basic menu operations 68
Blink
function 171
Border 143
parameters 179
BS button 85
Bus fixed mode
fader operation 128
wipe direction 131
Bus selection 97
Button
numbers 99
394
Index
direction 234
modifiers 234
modify clear 241
position 235, 243
resizer 246
snapshot 248
swap 313, 314
Door 364
Downstream key control block
66
Drop border 144
parameters 180
Duration
setting buttons 45
E
Edge
fill 145
modifiers 143
EDIT ENBL button 44
Edit point specification
buttons 44
Editing buttons 45
EFF LOOP button 46
Effect
menu 385
resizer 194
Effect execution direction
selection buttons 46
Emboss 144
Engineering Setup menu 389
Enter button 84, 86
External
key 271
External devices 28
External hard disk drive 303
F
G
Global
Effect menu 382
H
HF buttons 76
I
Image
data management 299
Image file
deletion 301
renaming 302
Independent key transition
21, 133
DME wipe settings 242
type 136
type selection buttons 66
wipe modifiers 214
wipe settings 213
Independent key transition
execution section 41, 67
Independent key transition rate
137
setting by a menu
operation 138
setting in the numeric
keypad control block
137
Input
string 85
value 84
Item display 84, 85
J
Joystick 43
K
Key 22
control block 54
default 147
delegation buttons 66
deleting 19
edge modifications 160,
179
Frame menu 384
inserting 19
mask 146
memory 146
modifier buttons 55
modifiers 143
modify clear 171
output status display 113
row 36
signal adjustments 155
status display 40
Key active 152
adjustment 154
KEY button 49
Key fill
selection 158
selection buttons 55
Key priority 109
display 113
selecting 109
Index
Index
Fader lever 39, 67
File menu 388
Files 31
deleting 301
renaming 302
Flip tumble 365
Frame
in-out 366, 371
Memory menu 377
Frame input mode 120
Frame memory
clip function 282
continuously capturing
still images (record)
277
pair file processing 299
recalling a continuous
sequence of still images
(animation) 279
Frame memory operations
259
capturing an input image
265
clip 284
input image selection 263
menu display 260
preparations 259
selecting frame memory
264
selecting outputs 264
Function
button area 76
selection buttons 48
395
setting by a menu
operation 111
setting in the transition
control block 109
Key row delegation buttons
37
Key setting
using menus 148
with the cross-point
control block 173
Key snapshot 196
buttons 67
recalling 197
saving 197
setting buttons 67
Key source
name display 67
selection 158
selection buttons 55
Key type
selection buttons 55
setting 149
Keyboard window 85
Keyer
copy 312
swap 312
Keyframe 28
control block 43
status 77
KF button 40
Knob 50, 56
parameter buttons 76
L
Left button 86
Line feed button 86
Linear key 141
Lock function 277
Luminance key 141
M
Index
M/E
copy 312
swap 312
M/E-1 to M/E-3 menus 372
Macro 30
396
Index
attachment 31
menu 383
timeline 30
Magnitude 209
Main mask
using 167, 183
Main menu site 89
Manual transition 127
Masks 145, 167, 183
Matte data
copy 314
swap 314
Max./min. value indication 84
Memory
card access indicator 51
card slot 51
recall buttons 65
Memory card/USB adaptor
block 51
“Memory Stick”/USB
connections block 52
“Memory Sticks” 52
Menu
accessing 68, 74
control block 50
display 50
operations 77
organization 68
page number button 75
screen 75
shortcut menu 89
shutting down 87
switching between the
main menu sites 89
title button 75
top menu list 68
MENU button 43, 61
Menu tree 372
Minus button 84
Misc menu operations 318
MIX 39, 271
Mix 103
MKS-8031 58
MKS-8032 66
MKS-8033 65
MKS-8035 54
MKS-8036A 61
Mode selection buttons 47
MORE button 56
Multi 211, 217
N
NAM 39, 103, 271
Next transition 103
selecting 103
selection buttons 38
Non-additive mix 39, 103
Non-Sync state 127
Normal
edge 182
mix 151
Numeric keypad 48
control block 46
window 83
O
ON AIR indicators 56
One-stroke mode 116
One-time mode 116
Operating buttons 42
Operation
buttons 59
modes 258
Outline 144
parameters 181
Output
destination specification
buttons 56
OVERRIDE button 57
P
Pair file processing 299
Pair mode 257
Parameter group button 76
Pattern key 271
Pattern limit 122
buttons 40
setting by a menu
operation 124
setting with the fader lever
123
transition 124
PGM/PST
menu 375
Picture-in-picture 366, 368
Plane function 151
Positioner 207, 214, 235, 243
Preset color mix 104
Preview 131
Previous page button 76
PRIOR SET button 41
PST COLOR MIX 39
R
Regions
selection buttons 47
Related manuals 15
Replication 217
Resizer DME wipe 246
Resizer DME wipe patterns
370
Right button 86
Rotation 208, 216
RUN CTRL button 46
S
T
TC button 84
Time offset execution 134
Timecode input mode 120
Top menu list 68
Top menu selection buttons
50
Top menu window 86
TRACE button 57
TRANS PVW button 40
Transition
control block 37, 136
execution 119
indicator 67
next 103
preview 131
Transition execution
section 39
with the fader lever 127
Transition indicator 39
function 119
Transition rate 120
display 39
setting by a menu
operation 122
setting in the MISC menu
321
setting in the numeric
keypad control block
121
Transition type 103
selecting by a menu
operation 114
selection buttons 39
Trim button 84
U
User preference button 51
User programmable DME
367, 369
Notes on keyframe
creation 250
patterns 249
transition mode 224, 249
Utility 30
Utility/shotbox control block
65
V
V/K mode 258
VF buttons 76
Video
processing 94, 172
signal adjustment 154
Video process 327
memory 328
settings 329
W
Window adjustment 153, 156
WIPE 39
Wipe 23, 104
copy 313
modify clear 212
pattern list 362
swap 313
Wipe direction 202, 214
selection buttons 40
Wipe modifiers 201
Wipe pattern
aspect ratio 210, 216
edge modification 203
replication 211, 217
rotation 208
selection 201
Wipe position 207, 214
Index
Index
Search dial 62
Setup 32
Shadow 144
parameters 180
SHIFT button 37
Shift button 86
Shortcut 89
Shotbox 30
Shotbox menu 387
SHOW KEY button 56
Show key function 185
Side flags
DME wipe action 355
MISC menu 352
wipe action 354
Signal
assignment to buttons 98
name display 102
selection 96
Simple P/P Software 357
Slide 363, 367, 370
Snapshot 29
menu 386
Soft edge 144, 214
Softening
edge 182
wipe pattern edge 214
Source
name displays 37
Space button 86
Speed 209
Squeeze 363, 367, 370
Status area 76
Status menu 324, 380
STOP NEXT KF button 46
Subsidiary menu site 89
SUPER MIX 39
Super mix 104
settings 115
Swap 312, 316
397
Wipe settings 201
for independent key
transitions 213
Wipe snapshot 218
X
XPT HOLD
button 37
Y
Y balance 153
adjustment 157
Z
Zabton 144, 166, 182
Z-ring 60
Index
398
Index
The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation
MVS-6000
System (SY)
4-136-350-01 (1)
Printed on recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
2009.03 13
©2009
Download PDF
Similar pages
Comant CI 105
Comant 105 Datasheet
Comant CI 305 Datasheet
Comant CI 105-6 7 Datasheet
Comant CI 105-16 Datasheet
Comant CI 105
Comant CI 105-25 Datasheet
user guide - DM Engineering
Comant CI 110-40